{"title":"Timber \u0026 Wire Fencing","description":"\u003cp\u003eTimber fence posts, gates, closeboard timber, post and rail, wire mesh, stock fencing and windbreak mesh for gardens, farms and sites.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"timber-gravel-boards-150x22mm-pressure-treated-green-brown","title":"Timber Gravel Boards 150 x 22mm, Square Edged, Pressure Treated, Green or Brown, 1.83m to 3.6m","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese square-edged gravel boards are for anyone building or repairing a timber fence who wants the panels or feather edge boards kept clear of the soil. Each 150mm x 22mm board fits at the base of the fence between the posts, where it takes the ground splash and damp that would otherwise soak into the bottom of your panels. Fencing contractors, landscapers and homeowners fit them for a practical reason: when a gravel board wears, you replace that board alone, far more cheaply than a panel. The boards are pine\/spruce mix, pressure treated and rough sawn, in Green treated (1.83m, 3m, 3.6m) or Brown treated (3m).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIt keeps the fence off wet ground\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTimber in contact with damp earth stays wet, and wet timber is where rot starts. A 150mm board at the base lifts your panels or feather edge boards clear of the soil, so the gravel board takes the splash and damp instead of the fence above it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIt is the part you replace, not the panel\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause the gravel board is a separate component, you can fit a new one when it wears without replacing the panel. That is a far cheaper repair and keeps the fence line intact.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treatment slows decay\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe pine\/spruce mix is pressure treated to improve resistance to insect attack and rot. Treatment slows decay rather than stopping it, so plan on replacing the board eventually, sooner where the ground stays wet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLighter and simpler than concrete\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt 4-8kg per board depending on length, timber is lighter to handle, easier to cut and fix, and more cost-effective than concrete gravel boards. The trade-off is plain: in permanently wet ground, timber will not last as long as concrete.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou will find these boards along domestic garden boundaries at the foot of 6ft panel fences, and under closeboard and feather edge fences on post-and-rail framing. Contractors use the longer lengths on new boundary runs for landscaping and new-build plots. They are also a straightforward repair where an existing gravel board has rotted, and a sensible choice in side passages where soil or gravel is banked against the fence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfile\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare-edged\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150mm x 22mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePine\/spruce mix\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treated to improve resistance to insect attack and rot\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRough sawn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen treated; Brown treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLengths available: Green\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.83m, 3m, 3.6m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLengths available: Brown\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen 2.4m; Brown 2.4m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4-8kg per board depending on length (natural product)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment use class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected service life \/ guarantee\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eLength\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1.83m board suits standard 6ft (1.83m) panel bays between posts, one board per bay. The 3m and 3.6m boards suit post-and-rail or closeboard runs with wider post spacing, or you can cut them down to fit two shorter bays with less waste. The 2.4m length is currently unavailable in both colours.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eColour\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrown treated is offered in 3m only, so if you need 1.83m or 3.6m, choose Green treated. Either colour weathers to silvery grey; an annual stain or preservative maintains the colour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTimber or concrete\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the base of your fence sits in permanently wet ground, a concrete gravel board will outlast timber.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFix each board to timber posts with galvanised screws or gravel board clips or brackets, or to a centre stump or cleat. Leave a small gap between the bottom edge and the ground so the board isn't buried. Treat any freshly cut ends with an end-grain preservative before fitting. To hold the colour, apply a stain or preservative once a year; otherwise the board will weather to silvery grey. When a board wears out, replace it on its own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill a timber gravel board last as long as a concrete one?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. In permanently wet ground, timber will not last as long as concrete. Timber is lighter, easier to cut and fix and more cost-effective, and a worn board can be replaced on its own far more cheaply than a panel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the 3m or 3.6m boards to fit my bays?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The longer lengths are often cut down to fit two shorter bays with less waste, which also covers wider bays now that 2.4m is unavailable. Treat every freshly cut end with an end-grain preservative before fitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the green or brown colour fade?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Treated softwood weathers to silvery grey over time, whichever colour you choose. To keep the green or brown look, apply a stain or preservative once a year. Weathering is a change in appearance only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat treatment use class and service life does this board have?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNeither is published for this line. What is stated is that the boards are pressure treated to improve resistance to insect attack and rot, and that timber will not last as long as concrete in permanently wet ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGravel boards are priced per board as listed, so add the number you need for your fence run in your chosen colour and length. Delivery is to UK mainland addresses, and long boards travel on a pallet or kerbside service. Your lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green \/ 1.83m","offer_id":63286344876419,"sku":"SSHF-116060-01","price":10.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 3m","offer_id":63286344909187,"sku":"SSHF-116060-02","price":14.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 3.6m","offer_id":63286344941955,"sku":"SSHF-116060-03","price":18.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 3m","offer_id":63286344974723,"sku":"SSHF-116060-04","price":14.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-treated-timber-gravel-board-closeboard-fence-1afc8328-1161-4109-8ebd-1e6118953255.jpg?v=1794524192"},{"product_id":"galvanised-welded-wire-mesh-panels-6x3-6x4-8x4","title":"Galvanised Welded Wire Mesh Panels, 6x3ft, 6x4ft and 8x4ft, 25mm to 75mm Mesh, 8 to 12 Gauge","description":"\u003cp\u003eWhen you need a rigid, flat sheet of steel mesh to fence off, cover, enclose or support something, galvanised welded wire mesh panels are the straightforward answer. Whether you are building a chicken run, lining a dog pen, covering a pond, framing a fruit cage or securing part of a site, these panels give you a ready-made grid you can cut, fix and get on with. The steel wire is hot-dip galvanised before welding, the economical standard grade for most garden, smallholding and site work. Three panel sizes, four hole sizes and three wire gauges let you match the mesh to the job in front of you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGalvanised wire, welded into a rigid grid\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach wire is hot-dip galvanised and then welded at every crossing point. The zinc coating protects the steel against rust outdoors, and the welds stop the grid shifting, so the panel keeps its shape and the apertures stay the size you ordered. That rigidity lets a panel stand as a fence section or span a frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe gauge sets the strength\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGauge numbers run backwards: the larger the number, the thinner the wire. 12 gauge is roughly 2.5mm, 10 gauge roughly 3.0mm and 8 gauge roughly 4.0mm. Thicker wire resists bending and impact better, but is heavier and harder to cut.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe limitation you should know about\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause the wire is galvanised before welding, the welding can remove a small amount of zinc at the joints, so those points are where rust is most likely to appear first. If you want maximum corrosion resistance at the welds, choose a post-weld galvanised panel instead. Cut ends are the other weak point: once you cut a panel, the exposed bare steel needs sealing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAround the home and garden, these panels go into chicken coops and runs, pet hutches, animal enclosures, aviaries and bird cages, dog fencing and garden fencing. Growers use them for fruit cages, climbing plant support, allotments and pond covers that keep leaves out of the water. Commercially they are used for security fencing, security cages and construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat welded wire mesh panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial and finish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel wire, hot-dip galvanised before welding (standard grade)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWire gauge\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12g (approx. 2.5mm); 10g (approx. 3.0mm); 8g (approx. 4.0mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e1.82m x 0.91m (6ft x 3ft)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25x25mm 12g; 50x50mm 12g; 50x50mm 10g; 75x25mm 12g (single or Pack of 4)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e1.82m x 1.22m (6ft x 4ft)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25x25mm 12g; 50x50mm 12g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e2.44m x 1.22m (8ft x 4ft)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25x25mm 12g; 50x50mm 12g; 75x25mm 12g; 75x75mm 8g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWeight per panel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eZinc coating weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with what the mesh has to keep in or out. As a guide, 25x25mm apertures suit smaller animals and 50x50mm suits larger animals. The 75x25mm mesh gives a narrow rectangular opening, and 75x75mm is the most open grid in the range. Most options are 12 gauge; for heavier wire, 10 gauge comes only as a 6ft x 3ft panel in 50x50mm, and 8 gauge only as an 8ft x 4ft panel in 75x75mm. Larger panels mean fewer joins on a long run; 6ft x 3ft panels are easier to carry. Not every combination exists, so check the table above. If protection at the welds matters more than cost, choose a post-weld galvanised panel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCut panels to size with bolt cutters or an angle grinder, wearing gloves and eye protection. Every cut end exposes bare steel and may rust, so treat the ends with galvanising spray or zinc-rich paint once you have finished cutting. You can staple the mesh to timber with galvanised staples, or secure it to posts with cable ties or clips. Check cut ends and welded joints from time to time and touch up any rust spots.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill these panels rust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe hot-dip galvanised wire protects the steel outdoors, but two areas need attention: the welded joints, where welding can remove a little zinc, and cut ends, which expose bare steel. Seal cut ends with galvanising spray or zinc-rich paint, and choose a post-weld galvanised panel if weld protection is a priority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich hole size should I choose for my animals?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general guide, 25x25mm suits smaller animals and 50x50mm suits larger animals. Size the mesh for the smallest animal the enclosure must hold. If you are unsure, the smaller aperture is the more cautious choice, provided it comes in your panel size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much does each panel weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight per panel is not published for this line, so we cannot give a reliable figure. Larger panels and thicker wire will be heavier, and the 8 gauge, 8ft x 4ft panel is the heaviest specification in the range. Plan for two people when handling 8ft x 4ft panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach combination of size, hole size, gauge and pack is priced per variant as listed, so select the exact option you need before adding it to your basket. We deliver to the UK mainland. Large items travel flat on a pallet or by a two-person or kerbside service. Your lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"1.82m x 0.91m (6ft x 3ft) \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286346056067,"sku":"SSHF-609913-01","price":44.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.82m x 0.91m (6ft x 3ft) \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 10 Gauge (3.0mm)","offer_id":63286346088835,"sku":"SSHF-609913-02","price":46.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.82m x 0.91m (6ft x 3ft) \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286346121603,"sku":"SSHF-609913-03","price":24.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.82m x 0.91m (6ft x 3ft) \/ 75mm x 25mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286346154371,"sku":"SSHF-609913-04","price":28.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.82m x 0.91m (6ft x 3ft) - Pack of 4 \/ 75mm x 25mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286346187139,"sku":"SSHF-609913-05","price":104.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.82m x 1.22m (6ft x 4ft) \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286346219907,"sku":"SSHF-609913-06","price":66.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.82m x 1.22m (6ft x 4ft) \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286346252675,"sku":"SSHF-609913-07","price":30.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.44m x 1.22m (8ft x 4ft) \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286346285443,"sku":"SSHF-609913-08","price":68.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.44m x 1.22m (8ft x 4ft) \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286346318211,"sku":"SSHF-609913-09","price":42.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.44m x 1.22m (8ft x 4ft) \/ 75mm x 25mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286346350979,"sku":"SSHF-609913-10","price":78.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.44m x 1.22m (8ft x 4ft) \/ 75mm x 75mm \/ 8 Gauge (4.0mm)","offer_id":63286346383747,"sku":"SSHF-609913-11","price":76.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/galvanised-welded-wire-mesh-panels-fruit-cage-207c0fcd-268c-4358-8903-cc764221ff49.jpg?v=1794524251"},{"product_id":"slotted-concrete-fence-posts-intermediate-end-corner","title":"Slotted Concrete Fence Posts, Intermediate, End and Corner, 5ft to 10ft, Steel Reinforced","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese slotted concrete fence posts are for contractors, landscapers and homeowners putting up or replacing a closeboard fence. Each post is dry-cast concrete with steel reinforcing rod centres, and the slots take closeboard panels and concrete gravel boards without nails, brackets or fixings: the panels simply slide into place. Use intermediate posts on straight runs, corner posts where the fence turns and end posts where a run finishes. If you are tired of timber posts rotting at ground level, concrete resists rot, rust and moisture, in a plain light grey that sits quietly behind planting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDry-cast concrete with a steel centre\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe concrete gives each post its mass and weather resistance, while steel reinforcing rods run through the centre. Strength and load figures are not published for this line, so size your posts with the pairing guide below rather than a rating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eResists rot, rust and moisture\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTimber posts usually fail where they meet wet ground. Concrete resists rot, rust and moisture, so there is no preservative to reapply to the posts. It is a low maintenance alternative to timber, not a no-maintenance one: your timber panels still need their usual care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSlots instead of fixings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePanels and gravel boards slide into the slots, so nothing needs nailing or bracketing to hold them. A damaged panel can later be lifted out and replaced without disturbing the post.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA clean, even finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe light grey posts have a smooth finish with minimal surface bubbles, so a long run looks consistent from post to post.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGarden boundaries between neighbouring properties, where a 6ft closeboard fence is the usual choice. Replacement jobs, where rotted timber posts are swapped out along an existing line. New-build and renovation plots, where the contractor wants a fence that needs little attention after handover. Side passages and driveway boundaries, wherever panels sit on concrete gravel boards to keep the timber off the soil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDry-cast concrete, steel reinforcing rod centres\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour and finish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight grey; smooth, minimal surface bubbles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e109mm x 94mm; 2 opposite slotted sides; 5ft, 6ft, 7ft, 8ft, 9ft, 10ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCorner post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125mm x 125mm; 2 adjacent slotted sides; 8ft, 9ft, 10ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100mm x 100mm; 1 slotted side; 7ft, 8ft, 9ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetric heights\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5ft 1.5m, 6ft 1.8m, 7ft 2.1m, 8ft 2.4m, 9ft 2.7m, 10ft 3.0m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30-88kg per post depending on size; per-height weight not published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTakes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCloseboard fence panels and concrete gravel boards\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSlot dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePost spacing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.83m centres for standard 6ft-wide panels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with the layout. Intermediate posts, with two opposite slotted sides, go between panels on a straight run. Corner posts, with two adjacent slotted sides, take panels at a right angle where the fence turns. End posts, with one slotted side, finish a run. Then match post length to panel height: 6ft post with a 3ft panel, 7ft with 4ft, 8ft with 5ft, and 9ft with a 5ft 6in or 6ft panel. A pairing for 5ft and 10ft posts is not published for this line. Note that end posts are only available here in 7ft, 8ft and 9ft, and corner posts in 8ft, 9ft and 10ft; other end and corner heights are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet roughly one-third of the post length below ground, so an 8ft post needs a 2ft hole. For standard 6ft-wide panels, space posts at 1.83m centres. Set each post in post mix concrete and prop it until the mix starts to set. As a guide, allow 1 bag per post for 5ft and 6ft posts, 1.5 bags for 7ft and 8ft, and 2 bags for 9ft and 10ft; the amount varies with hole size. Concrete posts are heavy and brittle if dropped on a corner, so handle each one with two people.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat length of post do I need for a 6ft fence?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse 8ft posts with 5ft panels sitting on 1ft (305mm) concrete gravel boards. Around a third of the post goes below ground, so each 8ft post sits in a 2ft hole and leaves 6ft of fence above ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need brackets or screws to hold the panels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Panels and concrete gravel boards slide into the slots, so no nails, brackets or fixings are needed to hold them. Order the right post type for each position so every panel has a slot on both sides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I get end or corner posts in 5ft or 6ft?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot on this listing. End posts come in 7ft, 8ft and 9ft, and corner posts in 8ft, 9ft and 10ft; other end and corner heights are currently unavailable. Intermediate posts are available in every height from 5ft to 10ft.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosts are priced per post as listed; choose the type and height from the options. Delivery is to UK mainland addresses. The posts are heavy, so they travel on a pallet to kerbside: plan for two people to unload them. Your lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"5ft \/ Intermediate","offer_id":63286347039107,"sku":"SSHF-718626-01","price":45.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"6ft \/ Intermediate","offer_id":63286347071875,"sku":"SSHF-718626-02","price":52.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"7ft \/ Intermediate","offer_id":63286347104643,"sku":"SSHF-718626-03","price":52.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"7ft \/ End","offer_id":63286347137411,"sku":"SSHF-718626-04","price":79.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"8ft \/ Intermediate","offer_id":63286347170179,"sku":"SSHF-718626-05","price":55.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"8ft \/ End","offer_id":63286347202947,"sku":"SSHF-718626-06","price":81.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"8ft \/ Corner","offer_id":63286347235715,"sku":"SSHF-718626-07","price":105.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"9ft \/ Intermediate","offer_id":63286347268483,"sku":"SSHF-718626-08","price":62.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"9ft \/ End","offer_id":63286347301251,"sku":"SSHF-718626-09","price":86.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"9ft \/ Corner","offer_id":63286347334019,"sku":"SSHF-718626-10","price":112.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"10ft \/ Intermediate","offer_id":63286347366787,"sku":"SSHF-718626-11","price":79.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"10ft \/ Corner","offer_id":63286347399555,"sku":"SSHF-718626-12","price":132.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/slotted-concrete-fence-posts-closeboard-garden-fence-1def102c-1f10-47ff-9215-5e0314531718.jpg?v=1794524303"},{"product_id":"uc4-square-timber-fence-posts-green-brown-treated","title":"UC4 Square Timber Fence Posts, Kiln Dried, Green or Brown Treated, 50mm to 200mm, 1.5m to 3m","description":"\u003cp\u003eOn a closeboard, panel or post-and-rail fence, the posts stand in wet soil for years while everything else hangs off them. These square pine fence posts are kiln dried and then pressure treated to UC4, the use class for timber in ground contact, so you can set them straight into the ground. They suit fencing contractors, landscapers, smallholders and homeowners who want a straightforward, rough-sawn post. Choose green or brown treatment, in sections from 50x50mm to 200x200mm and lengths from 1.5m to 3.0m, sold individually so you order exactly what your run needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKiln dried before it's treated\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe pine is dried in a kiln before treatment, so the preservative goes into timber that is ready to take it. That supports the deep penetration the treatment is designed to give, rather than a coating that sits near the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eUC4 pressure treatment for ground contact\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse class 4 covers timber that sits in the ground. Pressure treatment drives preservative deep into the post to protect against fungal decay, insect attack and water-borne rot, which is exactly where a post is most exposed: at and just below ground level. The expected service life in ground contact is around 15 years. That is an expectation, not a guarantee.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRough sawn, square section\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe surface is left rough sawn rather than planed. It's a working finish suited to fencing, gate posts and framing, not a smooth joinery face, so expect texture if you stain or paint it later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKiln dried, then pressure treated to UC4\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAround 15 years expected life in ground contact\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMost of these posts go into garden and boundary fencing: closeboard, panel and post-and-rail. The larger 150x150mm, 175x175mm and 200x200mm sections are used as gate posts where you need to hang a heavier gate. Beyond fencing, the same posts work as pergola uprights, raised bed corners, general framing and decking supports, and for livestock and paddock fencing on farms and smallholdings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRough sawn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKiln dried before treatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treated, UC4 (ground contact); the range table also lists UC3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected service life\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAround 15 years in ground contact (expected, not guaranteed)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen sections and lengths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50x50mm: 1.8m, 2.1m, 2.4m. 75x75mm: 1.8m, 2.1m, 2.4m, 3.0m. 100x100mm: 1.5m, 1.8m, 2.1m, 2.4m, 3.0m. 150x150mm: 2.4m, 3.0m. 175x175mm: 3.0m. 200x200mm: 3.0m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrown sections and lengths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75x75mm: 2.4m. 100x100mm: 1.8m, 2.4m, 3.0m (75x75mm at 1.8m currently unavailable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight, 50mm sections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox 3-6kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight, 75-100mm sections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox 8-20kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight, 150-200mm sections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStrength grade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with length. Plan to bury roughly a quarter to a third of the post, so add that to your finished fence height. A 2.4m post typically gives a 1.8m (6ft) fence with 600mm in the ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNext, pick the section. The 150x150mm to 200x200mm posts are the ones to choose for gate posts carrying heavier gates. The 50x50mm section is the lightest in the range; the spec table lists treatment for the range as UC4 and UC3, so if you need certified UC4 on 50mm posts, please confirm with us before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFinally, colour. Green-treated posts start green and weather to honey brown, then silvery grey. Brown-treated posts start brown and also silver with age. Brown comes in fewer sizes, so check the table first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBury roughly a quarter to a third of each post and set it in post mix or compacted hardcore. You can cut the posts with a circular saw, chainsaw or handsaw. Any freshly cut surface must be treated with a wood preservative such as an end-grain preserver, especially the end going into the ground. Once the treatment colour has faded, you can stain or paint the posts. An annual coat of stain or preservative keeps the colour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much of the post should go in the ground?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general rule, bury roughly a quarter to a third of the post and set it in post mix or compacted hardcore. For a 1.8m (6ft) fence, a 2.4m post with 600mm in the ground is the usual choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the posts to length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A circular saw, chainsaw or handsaw will do it. Treat every freshly cut surface with a wood preservative such as an end-grain preserver, and pay particular attention to any cut end that will go into the ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the green or brown colour last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo, it weathers. Green posts go honey brown and then silvery grey; brown posts also silver with age. If you want to hold a colour, stain or paint once the treatment colour fades and apply a stain or preservative each year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich size should I use for a gate post?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor hanging heavier gates, use one of the larger sections: 150x150mm, 175x175mm or 200x200mm. These are available in green only, with 150x150mm at 2.4m or 3.0m and the other two at 3.0m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosts are priced per post as listed: choose colour, section and length, then add the quantity you need. Delivery is to UK mainland addresses. Longer posts travel on a pallet or by kerbside service. Your lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green \/ 1.5m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63286347727235,"sku":"SSHF-330321-01","price":22.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.8m \/ 50mm x 50mm","offer_id":63286347760003,"sku":"SSHF-330321-02","price":8.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.8m \/ 75mm x 75mm","offer_id":63286347792771,"sku":"SSHF-330321-03","price":16.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.8m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63286347825539,"sku":"SSHF-330321-04","price":31.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 2.1m \/ 50mm x 50mm","offer_id":63286347858307,"sku":"SSHF-330321-05","price":9.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 2.1m \/ 75mm x 75mm","offer_id":63286347891075,"sku":"SSHF-330321-06","price":19.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 2.1m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63286347923843,"sku":"SSHF-330321-07","price":31.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 2.4m \/ 50mm x 50mm","offer_id":63286347956611,"sku":"SSHF-330321-08","price":11.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 2.4m \/ 75mm x 75mm","offer_id":63286347989379,"sku":"SSHF-330321-09","price":21.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 2.4m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63286348022147,"sku":"SSHF-330321-10","price":29.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 2.4m \/ 150mm x 150mm","offer_id":63286348054915,"sku":"SSHF-330321-11","price":91.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 3.0m \/ 75mm x 75mm","offer_id":63286348087683,"sku":"SSHF-330321-12","price":25.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 3.0m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63286348120451,"sku":"SSHF-330321-13","price":38.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 3.0m \/ 150mm x 150mm","offer_id":63286348153219,"sku":"SSHF-330321-14","price":114.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 3.0m \/ 175mm x 175mm","offer_id":63286348185987,"sku":"SSHF-330321-15","price":145.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 3.0m \/ 200mm x 200mm","offer_id":63286348218755,"sku":"SSHF-330321-16","price":208.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 1.8m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63286348251523,"sku":"SSHF-330321-17","price":31.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 2.4m \/ 75mm x 75mm","offer_id":63286348284291,"sku":"SSHF-330321-18","price":21.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 2.4m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63286348317059,"sku":"SSHF-330321-19","price":29.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 3.0m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63286348349827,"sku":"SSHF-330321-20","price":38.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-treated-square-fence-posts-post-and-rail-f792fc19-8cc2-49be-93d0-7c96fb237ada.jpg?v=1794524396"},{"product_id":"feather-edge-boards-125x22mm-pressure-treated-green-brown","title":"Feather Edge Boards 125 x 22mm (2EX), Pressure Treated, Green or Brown, 900mm to 2.4m","description":"\u003cp\u003eFeather edge boards are the face of a closeboard fence: the vertical boards you nail to arris or cant rails, each one lapping the last to form a solid screen. These are 125mm x 22mm (2EX) pressure-treated boards in a rough sawn pine\/spruce mix, in Green treated or Brown treated. Boards are sold individually, so you order exactly the number your run needs, from a handful of replacements to a full boundary. Lengths run from 900mm to 2.4m in green; brown starts at 1.2m, so check the options below before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eA tapered profile that locks the run together\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\"2EX\" means two feather edge boards are cut diagonally from one 125mm x 22mm board. Each board has a thick edge of approx 15mm tapering to a thin edge of approx 6mm. When you lap one board over the next, the thin edge sits under the thick edge of its neighbour, so there is no straight-through gap. Nailing through the thick edge also holds the thin edge of the next board in place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated for outdoor use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe boards are pressure treated, so they suit fencing and cladding that stays outside all year. Treat any freshly cut ends with an end-grain preservative. The treatment use class and expected service life are not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRough sawn softwood\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe boards are rough sawn, not planed, so expect a textured face and natural variation between boards. Treated softwood turns silvery grey as it ages; to keep the green or brown colour, apply a stain or preservative annually.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe main job is closeboard fencing: garden boundaries, side returns and runs between neighbours, with boards fixed vertically to arris or cant rails between posts. Board length sets the fence height, so 1.8m boards make a 6ft fence and shorter lengths suit lower front or dividing fences. The same boards are also used as general cladding for sheds, bin stores and screens where you want an overlapping vertical face.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNominal size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125mm x 22mm (2EX)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProfile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThick edge approx 15mm, thin edge approx 6mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTimber\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePine\/spruce mix\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTreatment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRough sawn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColour\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen treated or Brown treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLengths\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900mm, 1.2m, 1.5m, 1.65m, 1.8m, 2.4m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1-2kg per board (varies, natural product)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSold as\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle boards\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTreatment use class\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGreen\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBrown\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.65m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.4m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with height: board length equals fence height, so choose 1.8m boards for a 6ft fence. Then work out quantity. With a 25mm overlap each board covers about 100mm, so allow roughly 10 boards per metre run, plus a few spares for cutting. A typical 6ft fence along a 10-metre garden boundary therefore takes around 100 boards. Choose colour to match existing fencing or your planned stain, bearing in mind both weather to grey without maintenance. Watch the one gap: Brown is currently unavailable in 900mm, so choose Green for low 3ft fences.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFix boards vertically to arris or cant rails, overlapping each by about 20-25mm. Nail through the thick edge so the thin edge of the next board is held. Use galvanised or stainless ring-shank nails to avoid black staining. Keep boards out of wet soil by leaving a small gap at ground level or fitting a gravel board. Treat every freshly cut end with end-grain preservative, and apply a stain or preservative each year if you want to hold the colour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does 2EX mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo feather edge boards are cut diagonally from one 125mm x 22mm board. Each finished board has a thick edge of approx 15mm tapering to a thin edge of approx 6mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many boards do I need per metre?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith a 25mm overlap each board covers about 100mm, so allow roughly 10 boards per metre run. A 10-metre fence therefore needs around 100 boards, plus a few spares for cutting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the green or brown colour last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot without maintenance. Treated softwood turns silvery grey as it ages, whichever colour you choose. To keep the green or brown tone, apply a stain or preservative annually. If a grey fence suits you, you can let it weather.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich length do I need for a 6ft fence?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoard length equals fence height, so a 6ft fence takes 1.8m boards. The 1.8m length is available in both Green and Brown, and it is the most common choice for garden boundaries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoards are priced per board, as listed, and a minimum order quantity applies. Delivery is to UK mainland addresses. Larger orders travel on a pallet, so delivery needs vehicle access and a hard standing to unload onto. Lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation. Where a colour and length shows as unavailable, it cannot currently be ordered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green \/ 900mm","offer_id":63286348611971,"sku":"SSHF-153651-01","price":2.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.2m","offer_id":63286348677507,"sku":"SSHF-153651-03","price":2.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.5m","offer_id":63286348743043,"sku":"SSHF-153651-05","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.65m","offer_id":63286348808579,"sku":"SSHF-153651-07","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.8m","offer_id":63286348874115,"sku":"SSHF-153651-09","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 2.4m","offer_id":63286348939651,"sku":"SSHF-153651-11","price":5.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 1.2m","offer_id":63286348972419,"sku":"SSHF-153651-12","price":2.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 1.5m","offer_id":63286349037955,"sku":"SSHF-153651-14","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 1.65m","offer_id":63286349103491,"sku":"SSHF-153651-16","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 1.8m","offer_id":63286349169027,"sku":"SSHF-153651-18","price":4.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 2.4m","offer_id":63286349201795,"sku":"SSHF-153651-19","price":5.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-treated-feather-edge-boards-closeboard-fence-b45e3ec5-22db-4e57-87c1-20f90938221b.jpg?v=1794524486"},{"product_id":"mild-steel-stock-fencing-c8-80-15-hinge-joint","title":"Mild Steel Hinge Joint Stock Fencing C8\/80\/15, 80cm High, Class A Galvanised, 50m or 100m Roll","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis C8\/80\/15 mild steel stock fencing is hinge joint netting for farmers, smallholders and fencing contractors who need to keep sheep, cattle and other livestock contained. It is the most commonly used mild steel stock fence, made in the UK and supplied on 50m or 100m rolls. The code tells you how it is built: C for the traditional woven hinge joint, 8 horizontal line wires, 80cm high, with vertical stay wires every 15cm. Mild steel does not need to be strained as tightly as high-tensile netting, and it follows gradual turns off intermediate posts, so it suits wandering boundaries, hedge-backed field lines and shorter runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMild steel that follows the fence line\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause mild steel netting does not need to be strained as tightly as high-tensile, the tensioning job is less demanding. You can also make gradual turns off intermediate posts rather than setting a straining post at every slight bend, which saves assemblies on a boundary with many turns. Backed by a hedge, it gives you a cost-effective barrier that is easy to install.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA hinge joint you can adapt\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe hinge joint is the traditional woven joint for stock fencing. It is a cost-effective knot, and it can be cranked or turned out for special applications where a standard run will not quite fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeavier wire at the edges, Class A coating\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe top and bottom line wires are 3mm diameter; the intermediate line wires and vertical stays are 2.5mm. All wires have a tensile strength of 695-850 N\/mm². The wire is galvanised to Class A under BS EN 10244-2. Coating mass and expected service life are not published for this line, so protect the coating during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eC8\/80\/15 is a general-purpose livestock fence. You will find it containing sheep, cattle and other livestock on farms and smallholdings, along forestry boundaries and around equestrian paddocks. It is a common choice for hedge-backed field boundaries, where the netting keeps stock in alongside the hedge. Its tolerance of turns makes it practical on irregular field edges and shorter runs between gateways.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eC8\/80\/15 mild steel hinge joint stock fencing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCountry of manufacture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnited Kingdom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJoint type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHinge joint (C), traditional woven joint\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHorizontal line wires\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80cm (0.8m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical stay spacing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpacing between line wires\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop and bottom line wires\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3mm, tensile 695-850 N\/mm²\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntermediate line and stay wires\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.5mm, tensile 695-850 N\/mm²\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanising\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClass A to BS EN 10244-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoating mass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandards\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBS EN 10218-2 (wire dimensions and tolerances); BS EN 10223-5 (woven hinged joint and knotted mesh fencing)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll lengths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50m or 100m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAverage roll weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50m: 32kg; 100m: 64kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis listing offers one specification in two roll lengths. Choose 50m rolls for shorter runs and easier handling; at around 32kg, a 50m roll is the more manageable to move into position by hand. Choose 100m rolls for longer runs, where fewer joins means less time tying in.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBe clear about where mild steel fits. High-tensile netting has largely replaced mild steel for long, straight runs because it holds tension with fewer posts, so for a long straight boundary it is usually the better buy. Mild steel earns its place on shorter runs, turning runs and hedge-backed boundaries. Two strands of barbed wire or a single electric wire can be added along the top.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFit a straining post at every end and at every major change of direction, each supported by a strut or box assembly. Gradual turns can be taken off intermediate posts. Tie the netting off on the straining posts by hand or with suitable joiners. When tensioning, reduce the crimp in the netting by about 50%. Do not drive staples tight against the wire, as this damages the galvanised coating. Add barbed or electric wire along the top if required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I take the fence round bends without a straining post?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGradual turns can be made off intermediate posts, which is one of the main reasons to choose mild steel on a boundary with many turns. Every major change of direction still needs a straining post supported by a strut or box assembly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for a long, straight boundary?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt will do the job, but high-tensile netting has largely replaced mild steel for long, straight runs because it holds tension with fewer posts. Mild steel is the better fit for shorter runs, turning runs and hedge-backed boundaries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I add barbed or electric wire?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Two strands of barbed wire or a single electric wire can be added along the top of the netting. Make sure your posts and straining assemblies are set up for the extra wire before you add it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePriced per roll as listed. Delivery is to UK mainland addresses. Rolls are heavy, averaging 32kg for 50m and 64kg for 100m, so they travel on a pallet or by kerbside service; plan for help or handling equipment on arrival. Your lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"50m","offer_id":63286410248579,"sku":"SSHF-674178-01","price":170.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"100m","offer_id":63286410281347,"sku":"SSHF-674178-02","price":328.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/c8-80-15-stock-fencing-graduated-mesh-9566f46c-38e5-4bab-b3ee-f19a6ffdf46d.jpg?v=1794529118"},{"product_id":"wooden-5-bar-field-gates-green-treated-3ft-to-12ft","title":"Wooden 5 Bar Field Gates, Green Pressure Treated Softwood, 1.2m High, 3ft to 12ft, Universal Hang","description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you need to close off a field entrance, paddock or farm drive with a gate that looks right and keeps working, this traditional 5-bar field gate is the standard answer. It suits farmers, smallholders, estate managers, landscapers and homeowners who want a working timber gate rather than a decorative one. Each gate is made in the UK from sustainably sourced softwood, green pressure treated against rot and decay, with a planed finish. It stands 1.2m (4ft) high, comes in six lengths from 3ft to 12ft, and hangs left- or right-hand. Hinges, latches and posts are sold separately, so plan the full set before you dig the first post hole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated softwood\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGreen pressure treatment protects the timber against rot and decay, the usual failure point for a gate standing close to wet ground and long grass. Life expectancy is up to 15 years; how close you get depends on exposure, drainage around the posts and how hard the gate is worked.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDiamond bracing and substantial stiles\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe diagonal diamond bracing carries the weight of the bars back towards the hinge post. On a long gate that matters: load not returned to the hinge side pulls the closing end down, and a sagging gate drags, binds and stops latching. Two substantial stiles, one at either end, give strength where the hinges are fixed and where the latch takes daily knocks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eUniversal hanging and galvanised fixings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause the gate is symmetrical, you decide left- or right-hand on site, not at the order stage. Galvanised bolts and fixings give the metalwork protection against corrosion outdoors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMade in the UK, sustainably sourced softwood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGreen pressure treated, planed finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiamond bracing to help prevent sagging\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese gates go where a traditional timber field gate is expected: agricultural field and paddock entrances, livestock control and access points, rural and farm driveways, and park and estate boundaries. They also suit gardens and residential entrances where you want a traditional rural look rather than metal or close boarding. At 1.2m high, check the height suits your animals or use before you commit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDesign\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTraditional 5-bar field gate, diamond (diagonal) bracing, two substantial stiles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSustainably sourced softwood, made in the UK\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTreatment and finish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen pressure treated against rot and decay; planed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColour\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\/natural\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHanging\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUniversal: symmetrical, left- or right-hand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBolts and fixings\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m (4ft)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLengths available\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3ft (0.92m), 4ft (1.22m), 6ft (1.83m), 8ft (2.44m), 10ft (3.05m), 12ft (3.66m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5ft, 7ft, 9ft, 11ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30-75kg depending on length; per-length weights not published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLife expectancy\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 15 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTimber species and member sizes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNot included\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHinges, latches and posts (sold separately)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMeasure the clear opening between your posts, allow for hinge and latch clearance, and choose the length that fits. If your measurement falls between sizes, remember 5ft, 7ft, 9ft and 11ft are currently unavailable, so you may need to adjust post positions to suit a 3ft, 4ft, 6ft, 8ft, 10ft or 12ft gate. Match the hinges to the length: 3ft, 4ft and 6ft gates take 450mm (18in) hinges; 8ft, 10ft and 12ft gates take 600mm (24in) hinges. Choose from standard double strap hinge sets, adjustable hinge sets with hook-on plate, or double strap hinge sets with hook-on plate. On wider spans, an optional gate wheel supports the closing end.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHeavier, longer gates need substantial hanging posts set deep in the ground; timber or concrete gate posts both suit. Complete the job with hinges, a catch or latch, and a gate wheel if the span calls for one. Hang the gate on the back of the posts, or between them if you want it to open both ways. Gates should open inward towards your property. At 30-75kg, lift and hang it with two people, check bolts periodically, and keep soil and grass clear of the bottom rail.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre hinges and a latch included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Hinges, latches and posts are sold separately. Use 450mm (18in) hinges for 3ft to 6ft gates and 600mm (24in) hinges for 8ft to 12ft gates, then add a catch or latch to suit daily use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I hang it left- or right-hand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The universal, symmetrical design means the same gate hangs either way. You only decide which side takes the hinges when you set out your posts, not when you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long will the gate last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLife expectancy is up to 15 years. The softwood is green pressure treated against rot and decay, but real service life depends on exposure, ground conditions around the posts and how often the gate is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it come painted or stained?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It comes in the green\/natural colour of its pressure treatment with a planed finish. Guidance on painting or staining is not published for this line, so check with the coating manufacturer before applying anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGates are priced per gate as listed for each length, with delivery to UK mainland addresses. At 30-75kg they travel on a pallet or by a two-person or kerbside service, so plan for help moving the gate from the kerb or pallet to the opening. Your lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"3ft \/ 0.92m","offer_id":63286410969475,"sku":"SSHF-319009-01","price":249.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"4ft \/ 1.22m","offer_id":63286411002243,"sku":"SSHF-319009-02","price":282.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"6ft \/ 1.83m","offer_id":63286411035011,"sku":"SSHF-319009-03","price":341.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"8ft \/ 2.44m","offer_id":63286411067779,"sku":"SSHF-319009-04","price":401.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"10ft \/ 3.05m","offer_id":63286411100547,"sku":"SSHF-319009-05","price":447.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"12ft \/ 3.66m","offer_id":63286411133315,"sku":"SSHF-319009-06","price":478.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/wooden-5-bar-field-gate-farm-driveway-80d1e55a-946c-4dca-9ebc-46452b55584a.jpg?v=1794529159"},{"product_id":"premium-welded-wire-mesh-rolls-galvanised-after-welding","title":"Premium Welded Wire Mesh Rolls, Galvanised After Welding, 0.9m or 1.2m x 30m, 50mm, 25mm or 25 x 13mm Holes","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese welded wire mesh rolls are for anyone building something that has to stay outdoors and stay sound: aviaries, dog runs, chicken runs, pond covers, security cages and garden fencing. Each roll is hot-dip galvanised after welding, so the zinc coating covers the whole mesh, every weld included. That is the difference between this premium grade and economical standard galvanised rolls, which are galvanised before welding and can lose a small amount of coating at the joints. You can choose from four purchasable options, all 30m long, in 0.9m or 1.2m heights, with 50x50mm, 25x25mm or 25x13mm holes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGalvanised after welding, not before\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOn standard rolls the wire is galvanised first and then welded into mesh, and welding can remove a small amount of coating at each joint. Here the mesh is welded first and then hot-dip galvanised, so the zinc covers 100% of the mesh, including every weld. The points that hold the mesh together are coated just like the wire between them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eA higher quality finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGalvanising after welding gives a higher quality finish than economical standard galvanised rolls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eGauge matched to the job\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWire gauge runs backwards: the larger the number, the thinner the wire. The 16 gauge options use wire of approximately 1.6mm, while the 19 gauge option uses approximately 1.0mm wire, giving a finer, lighter mesh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThe limitation to know\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting the mesh exposes bare steel at the cut ends, and those ends may rust. Treat them with galvanising spray or zinc-rich paint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eZinc coating covers 100% of the mesh, welds included\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHigher quality finish than standard galvanised rolls\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e16 gauge (approx 1.6mm) or 19 gauge (approx 1.0mm) wire\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCut ends need protecting after cutting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou will find this mesh in security fencing and security cages, animal enclosures, dog runs, pet cages, pet hutches and chicken runs. It is used for aviaries and bird cages, garden and metal fencing, pond covers and pond leaf protection, and as support for climbing plants and on construction work. Because the welds are coated as well as the wire, it suits any structure that stays outside all year and depends on its joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHole size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWire gauge\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRoll length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eApprox roll weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailability\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.9m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50x50mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 (approx 1.6mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.9m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25x25mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 (approx 1.6mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e31kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25x25mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 (approx 1.6mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25x13mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19 (approx 1.0mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e34kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50x50mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 (approx 1.6mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13x13mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19 (approx 1.0mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded steel wire mesh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHot-dip galvanised after welding\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eZinc coating weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCut ends\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBare steel; protect with galvanising spray or zinc-rich paint\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with what the mesh has to keep in or out. As a rule of thumb, 25mm mesh suits smaller animals and 50mm mesh suits larger animals such as dogs. For a dog run or general garden fencing, the 0.9m 50x50mm 16 gauge roll is the lightest 16 gauge option at about 17kg. For smaller animals at the same height, the 0.9m 25x25mm 16 gauge roll gives closer mesh at approximately 31kg. If you need more height, the 1.2m 25x25mm 16 gauge roll is the heaviest here at around 46kg. The 1.2m 25x13mm 19 gauge roll has the smallest holes on this listing in thinner, approx 1.0mm wire, for jobs where a fine mesh matters more than wire thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnroll the mesh on a flat surface and weight the ends so it does not spring back while you work. Wear gloves throughout. On timber posts and frames, fix the mesh with galvanised staples (U-nails). On post-and-wire fencing, tie the mesh to the posts and line wires. Each time you cut the mesh, treat the cut ends with galvanising spray or zinc-rich paint, because they expose bare steel and may rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does galvanised after welding mean in practice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is welded first and then hot-dip galvanised, so the zinc covers 100% of the mesh, every weld included. Standard rolls are galvanised before welding, and the welding can remove a small amount of coating at the joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the mesh rust where I cut it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt can. Cutting exposes bare steel at the cut ends, and those ends may rust. Protect them straight after cutting with galvanising spray or zinc-rich paint, and touch them up if the coating wears.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs 16 gauge thicker than 19 gauge?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. With wire gauge, a larger number means thinner wire. The 16 gauge options here use wire of approximately 1.6mm, and the 19 gauge option uses approximately 1.0mm wire, so 16 gauge is the thicker of the two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich hole size should I choose for a dog run?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs general practice, 50mm mesh suits larger animals such as dogs, so the 0.9m 50x50mm 16 gauge roll is the usual starting point. For smaller animals, 25mm mesh is the better choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach option is priced per roll as listed. We deliver to UK mainland addresses. Depending on your order, rolls travel on a pallet or by a kerbside service, so plan how you will move them from the kerb to where you need them. Your lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"0.9m x 30m \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63286411755907,"sku":"SSHF-927612-01","price":276.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 30m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63286411788675,"sku":"SSHF-927612-02","price":188.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 30m \/ 25mm x 13mm \/ 19 Gauge (1.0mm)","offer_id":63286411821443,"sku":"SSHF-927612-03","price":192.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 30m \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63286411854211,"sku":"SSHF-927612-04","price":334.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/premium-galvanised-welded-mesh-roll-aviary-964eb8e1-14e2-4213-8c59-404af4d6f571.jpg?v=1794529200"},{"product_id":"cundy-peel-round-fence-posts-uc4-treated-pointed","title":"Cundy Peel Round Fence Posts, UC4 Treated Redwood, Pointed, 75-100mm or 50-75mm, 1.8m to 2.4m, Single or Packs","description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you are putting up stock fencing, post-and-rail or a rustic boundary, these peeled round posts are made for the line posts that carry the job. Each one is slow-grown European redwood, cundy peeled rather than machine rounded, pointed at one end for driving, and pressure treated to Use Class 4 for ground contact. They suit farmers, smallholders, landscapers and fencing contractors who want a natural-looking post that goes in quickly. You can buy 75-100mm posts singly or in packs of 5, 10 or 20 at 1.8m, singly or in packs of 5 or 20 at 2.4m, and a 50-75mm post singly at 2.1m. Diameter varies along each post, and that is part of the character.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePeeled, not machine rounded\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCundy peeling scrapes the bark off a roughly cut pole instead of turning it down to a set size. Because the outer fibres are not cut away, the post keeps its natural shape and strength. The trade-off: diameter is not uniform from end to end, and the surface looks rustic rather than smooth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTreatment that reaches the heartwood\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe posts are kiln dried, then pressure treated to UC4, the class for timber in contact with the ground. Peeling lets preservative penetrate better than machine rounding does, and the treatment reaches the heartwood to protect against fungal decay, rot and insect attack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA point for driving\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach post has a pointed end, so you can drive it with a post driver or knock it into prepared ground rather than digging every hole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat to expect over time\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpected lifespan is about 15 years. Treat that as an expectation, not a guarantee: soil, drainage, how the post is installed and whether it has been cut all affect it. Posts are green when new and weather to silver-grey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese posts are a common choice for post-and-wire stock fencing around fields and smallholdings, and for post-and-rail fencing on equestrian paddocks and driveways. In gardens they make a rustic boundary fence that suits a country setting better than sawn square posts. They are also used as stakes to support newly planted trees and hedges while they establish. If the job needs timber in the ground and a natural look above it, these posts fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSlow-grown European redwood (pine)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCundy peeled: roughly cut, bark scraped off, not machine rounded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePointed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKiln dried before treatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treated to Use Class 4 (UC4) for ground contact\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameter options\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75-100mm; 50-75mm (varies along each post)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75-100mm, 1.8m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle post; packs of 5, 10 and 20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75-100mm, 2.4m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle post; packs of 5 and 20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50-75mm, 2.1m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6-10kg per post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen when new, fading to silver\/grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected lifespan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 15 years (an expectation; many factors affect it)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.65m (single and packs); 2.1m in 75-100mm (single and packs); 2.7m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStrength grade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber certification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with the fence height. Plan for roughly a third of the post below ground, so the 1.8m length suits roughly 1.2m (4ft) post-and-wire stock fencing. The 2.4m length gives you the extra height for taller fences or post-and-rail. The 50-75mm post at 2.1m is the slimmer option, for lighter work such as tree and hedge support or rustic garden fencing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThen decide on quantity. Single posts cover repairs and short runs; packs of 5, 10 or 20 make sense when you are fencing a full boundary. Check the listing for the exact pack sizes offered at each length. The 1.65m length, 2.1m in the 75-100mm diameter and 2.7m posts are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrive or set roughly a third of each post below ground, using the pointed end to start it straight. Cut tops to height once the line is set, and treat every cut surface with an end-grain preservative to protect the exposed timber. At 6-10kg each, posts are manageable for one person, though a second pair of hands helps keep a line straight while driving. The change from green to silver-grey is normal weathering and needs no action.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy are the posts not all the same thickness?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThey are cundy peeled, not machine rounded, so each post follows the natural shape of the pole. Diameter varies along its length within the stated range. That keeps the outer fibres and natural strength intact, but it means you should not expect a uniform, lathe-turned look.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan these posts go straight into the ground?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. They are pressure treated to Use Class 4, which is the class intended for ground contact. Treatment penetrates to the heartwood against fungal decay, rot and insect attack. Remember to treat any surface you cut with end-grain preservative.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long will they last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpected lifespan is about 15 years, but that is an expectation rather than a guarantee. Soil type, drainage, installation method and untreated cuts all affect how long a post lasts in your conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosts are priced per post or per pack as listed. A minimum order of 2 applies, shown when you add to basket. We deliver to UK mainland addresses; long posts travel on a pallet or kerbside service. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"1.8m \/ 75-100mm \/ Single Post","offer_id":63286413361539,"sku":"SSHF-547346-01","price":17.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m \/ 75-100mm \/ 5 Pack","offer_id":63286413394307,"sku":"SSHF-547346-02","price":85.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m \/ 75-100mm \/ 10 Pack","offer_id":63286413427075,"sku":"SSHF-547346-03","price":169.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m \/ 75-100mm \/ 20 Pack","offer_id":63286413459843,"sku":"SSHF-547346-04","price":331.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.1m \/ 50-75mm \/ Single Post","offer_id":63286413492611,"sku":"SSHF-547346-05","price":19.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 75-100mm \/ Single Post","offer_id":63286413525379,"sku":"SSHF-547346-06","price":22.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 75-100mm \/ 5 Pack","offer_id":63286413558147,"sku":"SSHF-547346-07","price":111.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 75-100mm \/ 20 Pack","offer_id":63286413590915,"sku":"SSHF-547346-08","price":421.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/cundy-peeled-round-fence-posts-pointed-ends-10b781a0-6361-448c-9c7c-db2df74d7144.jpg?v=1794529253"},{"product_id":"galvanised-welded-wire-mesh-rolls-6mm-to-50mm-holes","title":"Galvanised Welded Wire Mesh Rolls, 0.3m to 2.4m High, 10m to 30m, 6mm to 50mm Holes, 10 to 23 Gauge","description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you are fencing in chickens, lining a rabbit run, guarding young trees or building an aviary or fruit cage, this galvanised welded wire mesh is the roll you unroll, cut to length and fix. It suits gardeners, smallholders, pet keepers and fencing trades. The steel wire is welded at every join and hot-dip zinc galvanised. Heights run from 0.3m to 2.4m and lengths from 10m to 30m, with holes from 6mm to 50mm and wire from a fine 23 gauge to a heavy 10 gauge. This is the standard grade; read the galvanising note below if weld coverage matters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWelded at every join\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery crossing point is welded, so the joins stay fixed when you cut the mesh or pull it across a frame. The holes keep their shape, and you can trim a panel to fit a hutch door or tree guard without the wires coming loose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eZinc galvanised steel\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe zinc layer protects the steel from rust outdoors, so it suits runs, guards and fences left out in all weathers. One limitation: published information conflicts on whether this standard grade is galvanised before or after welding. One source says after; another says the standard range is galvanised before welding, which can remove a little zinc at the welds. If you need guaranteed full zinc coverage at every weld, choose a post-weld (premium) galvanised roll instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eA gauge for the job\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe larger the number, the thinner the wire. 12 gauge (about 2.5mm) and thicker is the heavier grade suited to animal enclosures, while the finer 19 to 23 gauge rolls pair with small holes for screening and small cages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou will find this mesh on wire mesh fencing, security fences, dog and cat fencing and deer fencing. It is also used for chicken coops, rabbit runs, rabbit hutches, aviaries and other animal enclosures. Gardeners wrap it into tree protection guards and fruit cages. Fixed over timber decking and steps, it gives an anti-slip surface underfoot, and fine 6mm mesh suits hamster and mouse cages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel wire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eZinc (hot-dip) galvanised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGalvanising sequence\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSources conflict (before or after welding)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded at every mesh join\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFormat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll, cut to length on site\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeights\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.3m to 2.4m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLengths\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10m, 15m, 25m, 30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHole sizes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6mm, 13mm, 25mm, 25 x 13mm, 50mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWire gauges\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10g (approx 3.0mm), 12g (2.5mm), 14g (1.9mm), 15g (1.75mm), 16g (1.6mm), 19g (1.0mm), 22g (0.7mm), 23g (0.6mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRoll weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 6kg to 90kg depending on size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eZinc coating weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m x 30m 25mm; 1.8m x 25m 50mm 16g; 2.0m x 12.5m 50mm 14g\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with the hole. 6mm and 13mm suit very small animals and fine screening, such as hamster and mouse cages. 25mm suits small animal enclosures, hutches, cages, chicken coops and rabbit runs. 50mm suits fencing for larger animals such as dogs, foxes and deer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThen pick the gauge: 12 gauge and thicker is the heavier enclosure grade. Here the 12 and 10 gauge rolls all have a 50mm hole, while the 25mm rolls come in 15, 16 or 19 gauge, so 15 gauge is the stoutest small-hole choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFinally, match height and length to your run. The 1.8m and 2.4m rolls come in 50mm hole only, and the 2.4m roll is sold as a pack of five.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWear gloves whenever you handle the mesh. Unroll it on a flat surface, measure your run and cut to length. Fix it to timber posts and frames with galvanised U-nails or staples; on steel frames, posts and cages the mesh can be welded instead. Every cut end exposes bare steel and may rust, so treat cut ends with galvanising spray or zinc-rich paint once the mesh is fixed, and check them again from time to time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this mesh galvanised before or after welding?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePublished information conflicts. One source says this standard grade is galvanised after welding; another says the standard range is galvanised before welding, which can remove a little zinc at the welds. If full zinc coverage at the welds is essential, choose a post-weld (premium) galvanised roll.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the cut ends rust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThey can. Cutting exposes bare steel with no zinc protection, so cut ends may rust over time. Seal every cut with galvanising spray or zinc-rich paint as soon as the mesh is fitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I weld it to a steel frame?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. As well as being stapled to timber, the mesh can be welded to steel frames, posts and cages. Treat any bare steel left exposed afterwards with galvanising spray or zinc-rich paint, as you would a cut end.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach roll is priced per roll as listed, and the 2.4m roll is also offered as a pack of 5. A minimum order of 2 rolls applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery covers UK mainland addresses; heavier rolls travel on a pallet or kerbside service. Your lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"0.3m x 10m \/ 6mm x 6mm \/ 22 Gauge (0.7mm)","offer_id":63286415655299,"sku":"SSHF-246005-01","price":30.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.3m x 30m \/ 6mm x 6mm \/ 22 Gauge (0.7mm)","offer_id":63286415688067,"sku":"SSHF-246005-02","price":88.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m x 10m \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63286415720835,"sku":"SSHF-246005-03","price":48.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m x 30m \/ 6mm x 6mm \/ 22 Gauge (0.7mm)","offer_id":63286415753603,"sku":"SSHF-246005-04","price":144.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m x 30m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63286415786371,"sku":"SSHF-246005-05","price":96.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 10m \/ 6mm x 6mm \/ 22 Gauge (0.7mm)","offer_id":63286415819139,"sku":"SSHF-246005-06","price":248.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 15m \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 15 Gauge (1.75mm)","offer_id":63286415851907,"sku":"SSHF-246005-07","price":130.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 15m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286415884675,"sku":"SSHF-246005-08","price":144.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 25m \/ 13mm x 13mm \/ 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63286415917443,"sku":"SSHF-246005-09","price":500.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 25m \/ 25mm x 13mm \/ 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63286415950211,"sku":"SSHF-246005-10","price":347.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 10 Gauge (3.0mm)","offer_id":63286415982979,"sku":"SSHF-246005-11","price":375.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286416015747,"sku":"SSHF-246005-12","price":300.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 30m \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 19 Gauge (1.0mm)","offer_id":63286416048515,"sku":"SSHF-246005-13","price":144.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m x 30m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 15 Gauge (1.75mm)","offer_id":63286416081283,"sku":"SSHF-246005-14","price":160.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.0m x 30m \/ 13mm x 13mm \/ 19 Gauge (1.0mm)","offer_id":63286416114051,"sku":"SSHF-246005-15","price":260.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 10m \/ 6mm x 6mm \/ 23 Gauge (0.6mm)","offer_id":63286416146819,"sku":"SSHF-246005-16","price":100.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 10m \/ 25mm x 13mm \/ 19 Gauge (1.0mm)","offer_id":63286416179587,"sku":"SSHF-246005-17","price":52.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 10m \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 19 Gauge (1.0mm)","offer_id":63286416212355,"sku":"SSHF-246005-18","price":48.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 10m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286416245123,"sku":"SSHF-246005-19","price":120.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 25m \/ 13mm x 13mm \/ 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63286416277891,"sku":"SSHF-246005-20","price":600.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 10 Gauge (3.0mm)","offer_id":63286416310659,"sku":"SSHF-246005-21","price":516.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286416343427,"sku":"SSHF-246005-22","price":396.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 30m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 14 Gauge (1.9mm)","offer_id":63286416376195,"sku":"SSHF-246005-23","price":208.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.5m x 10m \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 15 Gauge (1.75mm)","offer_id":63286416408963,"sku":"SSHF-246005-24","price":142.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.5m x 10m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286416441731,"sku":"SSHF-246005-25","price":144.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.5m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 14 Gauge (1.9mm)","offer_id":63286416474499,"sku":"SSHF-246005-26","price":360.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.6m x 30m \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 19 Gauge (1.0mm)","offer_id":63286416507267,"sku":"SSHF-246005-27","price":230.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.6m x 30m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 15 Gauge (1.75mm)","offer_id":63286416540035,"sku":"SSHF-246005-28","price":280.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m x 10m \/ 25mm x 25mm \/ 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63286416572803,"sku":"SSHF-246005-29","price":192.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m x 10m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286416605571,"sku":"SSHF-246005-30","price":226.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 10 Gauge (3.0mm)","offer_id":63286416638339,"sku":"SSHF-246005-31","price":708.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286416671107,"sku":"SSHF-246005-32","price":560.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m x 25m - Pack of 5 \/ 50mm x 50mm \/ 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63286416703875,"sku":"SSHF-246005-33","price":2499.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/galvanised-welded-wire-mesh-roll-dog-run-6044dd76-e7ef-4b33-bbcc-cbf6a94ff1c7.jpg?v=1794529386"},{"product_id":"windbreak-cladding-mesh-green-1m-x-25m","title":"Windbreak Cladding Mesh, Green Stretched HDPE, UV Stabilised, 1m x 25m Roll","description":"\u003cp\u003eWindbreak cladding mesh is a stretched HDPE plastic mesh with small oval apertures, made to cut the speed of wind passing through it while still letting light and some air through. It comes in 1m x 25m rolls and suits growers, nurseries, allotment holders, smallholders, landscapers and fencing contractors who need to shelter plants, crops or livestock along a fence line. Green 1m x 25m is the option you can order. Black 1m x 25m is currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStretched for tensile strength\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe plastic is stretched during manufacture, which increases the tensile strength of the mesh. The result is a strong, durable sheet suited to both commercial and domestic windbreak fencing. A tensile or breaking strength figure is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOval apertures that slow the wind\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh has oval holes of 10 x 6mm (nominal). As wind passes through them, its speed is reduced by up to 50%. Because the mesh is permeable rather than solid, it filters the wind instead of stopping it dead, and sunlight still reaches the plants or animals behind it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eUV-stabilised and light to handle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe plastic is UV-stabilised for longevity outdoors. At 300g\/m² the mesh is light to carry and easy to install along a run of posts. An expected service life in years is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat it will not do\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a windbreak, not a wind block. It reduces wind speed by up to 50%, so some wind will always come through. It is also not self-supporting: it needs to be battened to wooden posts, and straining line wires should be used to add strength and rigidity. If you need a solid screen or a free-standing barrier, this is not the right product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCladding mesh is commonly used as wind protection for nurseries, gardens, crops, vegetable patches and allotments, where strong winds can damage exposed plants. It is also used to shelter livestock along an exposed boundary. Because it is strong enough for commercial use but light enough to put up by hand, it suits growers working at scale as well as gardeners protecting a single bed or plot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHDPE plastic mesh\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStretched during manufacture to increase tensile strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAperture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOval, 10 x 6mm (nominal)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWind reduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduces wind speed by up to 50%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV protection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV-stabilised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMesh weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300g\/m²\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m high x 25m long\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable to order\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen, 1m x 25m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack, 1m x 25m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile or breaking strength figure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected service life\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandards or certification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere is one size and one colour to order: green, 1m x 25m. The black version of the same mesh is currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you are weighing this up against hexagonal windbreak mesh, the difference is in how it is made. Cladding mesh is stretched during manufacture, which increases its tensile strength and makes the mesh itself very strong. A like-for-like comparison of wind reduction, weight or service life between the two is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo work out quantity, each roll covers 25 linear metres at 1m high. Divide the length of your fence line by 25 and round up to whole rolls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFix the mesh to wooden fence posts by battening, so that the mesh is squeezed between the post and a timber batten. This spreads the force of the wind across the whole width of the mesh at each joint, rather than concentrating it on a few filaments, as happens when the mesh is held with U-nails alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRun straining line wires along the fence line to add strength and rigidity and to keep the mesh taut. Batten size, post spacing and the number of line wires are not published for this line, so plan them around how exposed the site is.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCare guidance is not published for this line. Checking battens and wire tension after strong winds will keep the mesh taut.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much wind does it stop?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt reduces wind speed by up to 50% as the wind passes through the oval apertures. It filters wind rather than blocking it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I fix it with U-nails or staples?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBattening to wooden posts is the recommended method. Squeezing the mesh between post and batten spreads the wind load across the mesh, whereas U-nails put the load on just a few filaments. Straining line wires should also be used to keep the fence taut.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the black version available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Black 1m x 25m is currently unavailable. The green 1m x 25m roll is the same mesh type, with the same 10 x 6mm oval aperture and 300g\/m² weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much fence does the minimum order cover?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThree rolls cover 75 linear metres at 1m high.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWindbreak cladding mesh is priced per roll as listed. A minimum order of 3 rolls applies, shown when you add to basket. We deliver to UK mainland addresses. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green","offer_id":63287856464259,"sku":"SSHF-628880-01","price":85.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-windbreak-cladding-mesh-livestock-shelter-9ea27b60-3a0b-4e8b-9389-b70acd5aac5d.jpg?v=1794561754"},{"product_id":"concrete-gravel-boards-1-83m-x-150mm-recessed-smooth","title":"Concrete Gravel Boards 1.83m x 150mm x 50mm, Dry-Cast, Reinforced, Recessed or Smooth Faced","description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you are building or repairing a panel fence on concrete slotted posts, these gravel boards sit at the foot of each bay and keep the timber panel off the ground. They suit homeowners, landscapers and fencing contractors working on garden and boundary fences. Each board is dry-cast concrete reinforced with internal steel rods, 1.83m (6ft) long and 50mm thick. Two options can be bought: the Recessed board at 150mm high and the Smooth faced board at 150mm high. All 305mm-high boards (Smooth, Recessed and Rock Faced) are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKeeps panels out of the wet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA timber panel that touches soil or sits in surface water is where damp, rot and fungal decay usually start. A concrete gravel board lifts the panel clear of ground contact, which matters most in gardens with poor drainage or exposed ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSteel rods inside\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach board is reinforced with steel rods running through its centre. The boards are produced to meet BSI standards for strength and durability, and are made to resist impact, weathering and long-term ground moisture. The specific British Standard number is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDry-cast, so lighter to handle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDry casting keeps the weight of each board lower than traditional wet-cast concrete. The recessed board is the lighter of the two options, with a listed weight of about 26kg, and is light enough for one person to carry. The smooth faced board has a listed weight of about 30kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat to expect from the surface\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDry casting gives a smooth, consistent finish in natural light grey concrete. It is still plain cast concrete, though, and some surface bubbles are to be expected. If you need a blemish-free face, these boards will not give you that.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese boards go into domestic garden fencing, boundary fences that run over damp ground, and any panel fence where you want the timber to last longer. They also replace rotted timber gravel boards in an existing run of concrete slotted posts. Boards can be stacked within slotted posts to build a deeper concrete base, or even a full concrete panel fence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConcrete gravel board\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDry-cast concrete, reinforced with internal steel rods\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.83m (6ft)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFace styles available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecessed; Smooth faced\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNatural concrete, light grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmooth concrete; some surface bubbles expected\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight, Recessed 150mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 26kg per board (listed weight)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight, Smooth 150mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 30kg per board (listed weight)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePost compatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConcrete slotted fence posts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduced to meet BSI standards; standard number not published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll 305mm-high boards: Smooth, Recessed and Rock Faced\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad or strength rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth options share the same size, construction and post fit, so the choice comes down to handling and appearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRecessed\u003c\/strong\u003e board does everything a standard board does but is lighter and easier to handle, at about 26kg. Choose it if you are fitting on your own or carrying boards any distance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eSmooth faced\u003c\/strong\u003e board has a plain, flat face with the smooth dry-cast finish. It is the heavier of the two, at about 30kg. Choose it for a plain, uniform look along the bottom of the fence. Any purpose for the face styles beyond weight and appearance is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRock Faced boards are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe boards are designed to slot into concrete slotted fence posts. Each board drops into the slots at the foot of the bay, and the fence panel sits above it, held clear of the soil. Check post spacing against your posts and panels before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe recessed board can be carried by one person; the smooth board is heavier, so plan your lifting and have help on hand for a long run. Guidance on cutting boards to length is not published for this line. Once fitted, the boards are low maintenance, and no specific care routine is published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill these fit timber fence posts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe boards are designed to slot into concrete slotted fence posts. Fitting to timber posts, with brackets or otherwise, is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I stack them to make a taller base?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Gravel boards can be stacked within concrete slotted posts to form a continuous concrete base, or even a full concrete panel fence. This is often done in damp areas or where the fence takes knocks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the face be perfectly smooth?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDry casting gives a smooth, consistent finish, but some surface bubbles are to be expected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan one person carry a board?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe recessed board, at about 26kg, is light enough for one person to carry. The smooth faced board is about 30kg, so you may prefer a second pair of hands.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoards are priced per board as listed. A minimum order of 5 boards applies, shown when you add to basket. We deliver to UK mainland addresses; heavy items such as these travel on a pallet or kerbside service. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Recessed","offer_id":63287857185155,"sku":"SSHF-264061-01","price":40.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Smooth Faced","offer_id":63287857217923,"sku":"SSHF-264061-02","price":43.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/smooth-concrete-gravel-board-garden-fence-357b4c96-997a-4648-9d89-42b2d9b3a679.jpg?v=1794561786"},{"product_id":"knitted-windbreak-mesh-green-1m-2m-x-50m","title":"Knitted Windbreak Mesh, Green HDPE, Heavy Duty, UV Stabilised, 1m or 2m x 50m Rolls","description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you need to take the force out of the wind around crops, stock, nursery beds or an exposed building, this green knitted windbreak mesh is the heavy-duty option. It is knitted from HDPE plastic monofilament, UV stabilised for outdoor exposure, and designed to reduce wind speed by up to 45%. Eyelets run along the top and bottom of every roll, so it fixes straight onto posts or straining wire. It suits farmers, growers, nurseries, allotment holders and fencing contractors. You can buy it in two roll sizes: 1m x 50m and 2m x 50m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnitted HDPE monofilament\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is knitted from HDPE plastic filaments into a monofilament netting. The result is a tough, durable windbreak, and this is the heavy-duty grade rather than a lightweight garden mesh. It weighs 100g\/m².\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFilters the wind rather than blocking it\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is designed to reduce wind speeds by up to 45%. It is a netting, so air still passes through and the wind is slowed on the sheltered side. The honest limitation: this is a reduction, not a seal. Expect calmer air behind the mesh, not still air, and do not rely on it as a solid screen or a weatherproof wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eEyelets top and bottom\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFixing eyelets are built into the top and bottom edges of each roll. They let you tie the mesh to timber posts or thread it onto straining line wire without punching your own holes, which keeps installation quick and simple.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eUV stabilised for long exposure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe netting is UV stabilised, so it is made to stay in place outdoors through the seasons. No service life in years is published for this line, so treat UV stabilisation as protection against sunlight degradation rather than a stated lifespan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is used for both temporary and permanent fencing that protects against wind, rain and drifting snow. On farms it is fitted to barn ends, side vents and backdrops, and it is used for livestock screening. Growers use it to protect field crops, container-grown nursery stock, allotments and gardens, and as crop cover. Because it filters as well as shelters, it is also used for dust control and shading. Once it is up, the wind protection is immediate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHDPE plastic, knitted monofilament netting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll sizes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 50m; 2m x 50m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMesh weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100g\/m²\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eListed roll weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6kg (1m x 50m); 12kg (2m x 50m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWind reduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 45%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV treatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV stabilised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEyelets along the top and bottom of each roll\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProtection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWind and shade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAperture size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShade percentage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEyelet spacing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected service life\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the height by what you are sheltering. The 1m x 50m roll suits low work: rows of crops, nursery beds, allotments and the lower part of a fence or vent. The 2m x 50m roll gives taller shelter for livestock screening, barn ends, side vents and full-height boundary windbreaks. Both rolls are 50m long, so a single roll of either height covers the same length of run; the 2m roll simply carries twice the area and twice the weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you only need light shelter for a small garden, a lighter-weight windbreak mesh may be enough. This knitted mesh is the heavier, tougher choice, intended for exposed sites, permanent runs and agricultural use where a light mesh would not last.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFix the mesh to posts facing the prevailing wind, and plan the line of the run around the direction your worst weather comes from. It can be fixed to timber posts, straining line wire, cladding and other support systems. Use the eyelets top and bottom to tie the mesh in or attach it to straining wire, and keep it taut along the run so it does not flap. A 2m roll at 12kg is manageable for one person to carry, but a second person makes unrolling and fixing a 50m run much easier. Check fixings after high winds and re-tension any slack sections.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill it stop the wind completely?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is designed to reduce wind speeds by up to 45%. Air still passes through the mesh and is slowed on the sheltered side, so expect calmer conditions rather than still air.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat can I fix it to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTimber posts, straining line wire, cladding and other systems. The eyelets along the top and bottom edges are there for fixing and for attaching to straining wire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it stay up all year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used for permanent as well as temporary windbreaks, and the netting is UV stabilised for outdoor exposure. A service life in years is not published for this line, so inspect it periodically.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it give shade as well?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, it offers both wind and shade protection, and shading is one of its listed uses. A shade percentage is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is priced per roll as listed. A minimum order of 2 rolls applies, shown when you add to basket. We deliver to UK mainland addresses. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"1m x 50m","offer_id":63287858037123,"sku":"SSHF-490985-01","price":118.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2m x 50m","offer_id":63287858069891,"sku":"SSHF-490985-02","price":224.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/knitted-windbreak-mesh-allotment-9749186b-fbbb-41cf-a7c6-1658217d8b50.jpg?v=1794561816"},{"product_id":"windbreak-fencing-mesh-hdpe-green-black-30m","title":"Windbreak Fencing Mesh, HDPE, UV Stabilised, 30m Rolls, Green 0.5m or Black 2m High","description":"\u003cp\u003eWindbreak fencing mesh takes the force out of the wind across crops, plants, livestock and nursery stock while still letting air through. It is a lightweight HDPE plastic mesh with a hexagonal aperture, UV stabilised and rot resistant, and supplied in 30m rolls. It suits growers, farmers, nurseries, landscapers and gardeners who need shelter along an exposed boundary without building a solid fence. You can currently buy Green 0.5m x 30m and Black 2m x 30m. Green 1m x 30m, Green 2m x 30m and Black 1m x 30m are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIt filters the wind rather than blocking it\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAround half of the mesh area is open holes. As the wind passes through those holes its force is broken, and the published figure is a 50% reduction in wind speed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA hexagonal aperture for strength\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe holes are hexagonal and nominally 8 x 6mm. The hexagonal shape improves the strength of the mesh so it can withstand strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHDPE that copes with the weather\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is made from HDPE plastic that is UV stabilised and rot resistant. At 400g\/m² it is light to carry and handle: a 0.5m x 30m roll weighs about 6kg and a 2m x 30m roll about 24kg. An expected service life is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe limitation: it depends on proper fixing\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis mesh is not designed to be nailed or stapled straight to a post. It needs to be battened, clamped between the post and a timber batten, so the full length of the mesh takes the wind load. If it is only U-nailed, individual filaments can break at the nail points and the fence can blow down. Allow for battens, as well as posts, in your materials list.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is used to protect crops, plants, animals and nurseries from heavy and damaging winds. On farms and smallholdings it forms agricultural fencing that shelters stock and exposed fields. In horticulture it shelters growing areas, young plants and nursery beds. In gardens it makes a decorative fence. The 0.5m height suits low shelter runs close to the ground; the 2m height suits taller screens along a boundary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHDPE plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAperture shape\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHexagonal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMesh hole size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 x 6mm (nominal)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 50%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWind speed reduction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400g\/m²\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV stabilised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRot\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRot resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen 0.5m x 30m: about 6kg; Black 2m x 30m: about 24kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen, black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBattened to timber posts; straining line wire recommended\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected service life\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFire rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColour\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSize\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailability\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.5m x 30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2m x 30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2m x 30m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with the height of shelter you need. The 0.5m roll gives low protection for beds, young plants and ground-level runs. The 2m roll gives a full-height screen for stock, nurseries and garden boundaries. At present, the 0.5m height comes in green only and the 2m height in black only, so your choice of height also sets the colour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe same specification is published for both colours. Then work out how many rolls you need: divide the length of the run by 30m and round up. A minimum order of 2 rolls gives you 60m of mesh to start with.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet timber posts along the fence line, then batten the mesh: hold it against each post and fix a timber batten over it, so the mesh is clamped along its full height. Do not rely on U-nails alone, as filaments can break at the nail points and the fence can come down in strong wind. Run a straining line wire along the fence for added strength and security, and to help keep the mesh taut. Post size and spacing are not published for this line, so size and space your posts to suit how exposed the site is. After strong winds, walk the line and check battens and wires are still secure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill it stop the wind completely?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. About half of the mesh is open, and the published figure is a 50% reduction in wind speed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I staple or nail it straight to the posts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The mesh should be battened to timber posts so the whole length takes the wind load. Fixing with U-nails alone can cause filaments to break at the fixing points and the fence to blow down.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs there any difference between green and black?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe same material, aperture, weight and wind reduction are published for both. The practical difference is size: green is currently available at 0.5m and black at 2m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long will it last outdoors?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HDPE is UV stabilised and rot resistant. An expected service life is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWindbreak mesh is priced per roll as listed. A minimum order of 2 rolls applies, shown when you add to basket. We deliver to UK mainland addresses. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green \/ 0.5m x 30m","offer_id":63287858626947,"sku":"SSHF-326491-01","price":66.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Black \/ 2m x 30m","offer_id":63287858659715,"sku":"SSHF-326491-02","price":273.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-windbreak-fencing-mesh-hedge-planting-865d8862-c372-4fa9-9109-59833e409343.jpg?v=1794561851"},{"product_id":"plastic-barrier-fencing-mesh-orange-green-1m","title":"Plastic Barrier Fencing Mesh, Orange or Green, 1m High, 15m to 50m Rolls, 80gsm to 140gsm, With or Without Pins","description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you need to mark out a work area, keep people off fresh seed or guide a crowd at an event, this 1m high barrier fencing mesh puts a clear line on the ground quickly. It is extruded polypropylene mesh made from recycled material, UV-stabilised for outdoor use, and supplied on rolls you can pin out, take down and reuse. It suits site managers, groundskeepers, event organisers and gardeners. One listing covers both colours: high-visibility Orange in 90gsm, and Green in 80gsm, 110gsm and 140gsm. Several green rolls come bundled with 10 steel fencing pins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStretched for strength\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is stretched during extrusion, which increases its tensile strength and helps it cope with rough handling on site. A tensile strength figure is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMade for outdoor use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUV stabilisation gives the mesh a longer life outdoors. A rated lifespan is not published for this line, so check the fence periodically on longer jobs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eQuick to put up, easy to reuse\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is lightweight and fast to install on steel shepherd's crook pins, then rolls back up for the next job.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat it is not\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a temporary, visual barrier for cordoning off and guiding people. It marks a boundary; it is not a security fence and will not stop someone determined to get through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrange mesh cordons off building and construction sites, sporting event areas and pedestrian routes, where a bright warning colour matters. Green mesh is used for garden fencing, pitches, cricket squares and football goal mouths, re-seeded grass, and temporary barriers at fetes, parties and weddings. Both colours are used for crowd control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtruded polypropylene, recycled material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV-stabilised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange 90gsm; Green 80gsm, 110gsm, 140gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eListed weight, Orange 90gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15m: 1.35kg; 50m: 4.5kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eListed weight, Green 80gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25m + pins: 8.25kg; 50m + pins: 10.5kg; 25m: not published\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eListed weight, Green 110gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50m: 5.5kg; 50m + pins: 11.5kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eListed weight, Green 140gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25m: 4kg; 25m + pins: 9.5kg; 50m: 7kg; 50m + pins: 13kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePins (bundles)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 steel shepherd's crook pins, 1.15m high x 8mm diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePin finish in bundles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMesh aperture\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePublished grade names conflict: 90gsm orange appears as both Extra Light and Light, and Extra Light green as both 80gsm and 90g\/m². Choose by the gsm figure in the options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColour\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRoll\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStatus\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 15m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 50m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 25m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 25m + 10 Pins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 50m + 10 Pins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 50m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 50m + 10 Pins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 25m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 25m + 10 Pins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 50m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 50m + 10 Pins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAny\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 25m; any roll with pins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll rolls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAny\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 15m, with or without pins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1m x 50m without pins\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200gsm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll rolls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eColour.\u003c\/strong\u003e Choose orange where the fence needs to warn, such as around construction work. Choose green where it should blend in with natural surroundings, such as gardens and sports grounds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGrade.\u003c\/strong\u003e Lighter grades suit short-term domestic jobs. The 140gsm grade is described as ideal for extended use, such as fencing that stays up for months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWith or without pins.\u003c\/strong\u003e Bundles include 10 steel pins, roughly one every 5m on a 50m roll or every 2.5m on a 25m roll. Choose a plain roll if you already have pins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnroll the mesh along your line and hold it upright on steel shepherd's crook pins; the hooked top makes it easy to attach the top edge. Space pins no more than 5m apart; one every 2.5m gives a better-secured, longer-lasting fence. Untreated standard pins will rust outdoors without affecting their life, while galvanised electroplated pins resist rust. To reuse, remove the pins and roll the mesh up neatly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many pins will I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAllow at least one every 5m, so around 10 to 11 for a 50m roll. For a better-secured fence, use one every 2.5m, around 20 for 50m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I leave it up for months?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is UV-stabilised, and 140gsm is the grade described for extended use. It remains a temporary fence, so inspect and re-pin it as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill it keep people out of a site?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a visible marker showing people where not to go. Where you need to physically secure an area, use a security fence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBarrier mesh is priced per roll as listed, with pin bundles priced per roll including the pins. A minimum order of 4 rolls applies, shown when you add to basket. We deliver to UK mainland addresses. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Orange \/ 90gsm \/ 1m x 15m","offer_id":63287859904899,"sku":"SSHF-933153-01","price":8.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Orange \/ 90gsm \/ 1m x 50m","offer_id":63287859937667,"sku":"SSHF-933153-02","price":29.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 80gsm \/ 1m x 25m","offer_id":63287859970435,"sku":"SSHF-933153-03","price":17.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 80gsm \/ 1m x 25m + 10 Pins","offer_id":63287860003203,"sku":"SSHF-933153-04","price":53.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 80gsm \/ 1m x 50m + 10 Pins","offer_id":63287860035971,"sku":"SSHF-933153-05","price":70.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 110gsm \/ 1m x 50m","offer_id":63287860068739,"sku":"SSHF-933153-06","price":36.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 110gsm \/ 1m x 50m + 10 Pins","offer_id":63287860101507,"sku":"SSHF-933153-07","price":79.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 140gsm \/ 1m x 25m","offer_id":63287860134275,"sku":"SSHF-933153-08","price":24.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 140gsm \/ 1m x 25m + 10 Pins","offer_id":63287860167043,"sku":"SSHF-933153-09","price":64.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 140gsm \/ 1m x 50m","offer_id":63287860199811,"sku":"SSHF-933153-10","price":50.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 140gsm \/ 1m x 50m + 10 Pins","offer_id":63287860232579,"sku":"SSHF-933153-11","price":90.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/orange-barrier-fencing-mesh-building-site-b5b2926c-621f-4dfb-9298-e97cd327efa6.jpg?v=1794561917"},{"product_id":"cundy-peel-round-strainer-post-2-4m-125-150mm","title":"Cundy Peel Round Strainer Post, UC4 Treated, Pointed, 2.4m x 125-150mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis cundy peeled round strainer post is made for the end, corner and support positions of post-and-wire and stock fencing, where the fence needs strength and stability. It is slow-grown European redwood, peeled rather than machine rounded, pointed at one end, kiln dried and pressure treated to Use Class 4 for ground contact. It suits farmers, smallholders and fencing contractors. You can buy it at 2.4m long in a 125-150mm diameter. The 3m length in 150-175mm diameter is currently unavailable. Diameter varies along each post.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePeeled for a stronger strainer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCundy peeling roughly cuts the pole and scrapes the bark off, instead of turning it down to a set size on a machine. Because the peeling process does not change the intrinsic nature or shape of the timber, the result is a stronger strainer than one that has been machine rounded. The finish is rustic and natural.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTreatment for ground contact\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosts are kiln dried, then pressure treated to UC4, the use class for timber in contact with the ground. The peeled surface allows better preservative penetration than machine rounding, and the pine lets the treatment reach the heartwood. That gives a protective barrier through the post against fungal decay, rot and insect attack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePointed for installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach post has a pointed end for ease of installation. At 125-150mm across and 17kg per post, this is a much heavier section than a line post, so plan how you will handle and set it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe honest limitation: diameter varies\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause the post is not machine rounded, its diameter is not uniform along its length. The 125-150mm figure is a range, not a fixed size, and one end may be noticeably thicker than the other. Allow for this if fittings or tools need an exact diameter. The expected lifespan is about 15 years, but that is an expectation rather than a guarantee; many factors affect how long a post lasts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStrainer posts go at the ends, corners and support points of post-and-wire and stock fencing runs on farms, smallholdings and paddocks. This post is intended for use with stock fencing, welded wire rolls and panels, chicken and rabbit wire, and straining line wire, fixed with galvanised staples or U-nails. Between the strainers, slimmer line posts carry the netting or wire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSlow-grown European redwood (pine)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCundy peeled: roughly cut, bark scraped off, not machine rounded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePointed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKiln dried before treatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treated to Use Class 4 (UC4) for ground contact\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePosition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd, corner or support (strainer) post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.4m (2400mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125-150mm (varies along the post)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17kg per post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen when new, fading to silver\/grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected lifespan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 15 years (an expectation; many factors affect it)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3m long, 150-175mm diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended setting depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStrength grade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber certification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a strainer post wherever the fence starts, ends, turns a corner or needs extra support, and use line posts for the run in between. The strainer is the heavier section. This post is 125-150mm in diameter and is designed to provide strength and stability, while the matching cundy peeled line posts are a slimmer section for the line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt present the only size you can order is 2.4m long in 125-150mm. The 3m length in 150-175mm is currently unavailable, so plan around the 2.4m post if your design calls for something longer or thicker. Strut sizes, bracing and spacing between strainers are not published for this line; follow your fence design or your contractor's specification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the pointed end to start the post straight. Items listed for use alongside this post include a post hole digger, a post hole rammer and fence post cement, so a dug hole that is rammed or cemented is an option as well as driving. At 17kg per post, a second person helps keep each strainer upright and in line. Cut tops to height once the post is in, and treat any cut surface with a suitable timber preservative. Weathering from green to silver-grey is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between a strainer and a line post?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA strainer is the larger end, corner or support post that gives the fence its strength and stability; this one is 125-150mm in diameter. Line posts are slimmer and fill the run between strainers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy is the post thicker at one point than another?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is cundy peeled, not machine rounded, so it follows the natural shape of the pole. Diameter varies along its length within the stated range. Do not expect a uniform, lathe-turned post.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it go straight into the ground?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It is pressure treated to Use Class 4, the class intended for ground contact, and the treatment penetrates to the heartwood against fungal decay, rot and insect attack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long will it last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe expected lifespan is about 15 years. That is an expectation, not a guarantee. Soil, drainage, installation and cutting all affect it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosts are priced per post as listed. A minimum order of 4 posts applies, shown when you add to basket. We deliver to UK mainland addresses; long posts travel on a pallet or kerbside service. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"2.4m x 125-150mm","offer_id":63288209342851,"sku":"SSHF-455699-01","price":53.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/cundy-peel-round-strainer-posts-farmyard-207cddc8-6bf8-4e4f-818f-4477192e35ab.jpg?v=1794566686"},{"product_id":"small-galvanised-welded-wire-mesh-sheets-3ft-x-2ft","title":"Small Galvanised Welded Wire Mesh Sheets, 0.9m x 0.6m (3ft x 2ft), 19 Gauge, 25mm or 6mm Holes","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese small welded wire mesh sheets are a practical size for garden, allotment and small enclosure jobs where a full-size panel would be more than you need. Each sheet measures 0.9m × 0.6m (3ft × 2ft) and is made from 19 gauge (1.0mm) galvanised steel wire, welded into a grid of square holes. Two hole sizes are available to buy: 25mm × 25mm and 6mm × 6mm. The 13mm × 13mm hole size is currently unavailable. They suit small animal keepers, gardeners and allotment holders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA welded grid in a manageable size\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is welded wire mesh: the steel wires are joined where they cross to form a fixed grid of square apertures. At 3ft × 2ft, a sheet is small enough to carry, measure and fit on your own and suits hutch fronts, cage panels and covers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGalvanised steel for outdoor use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe wire is hot-dip galvanised. Galvanising coats the steel with a protective layer that helps it resist corrosion and rust, which is why this type of mesh is a common choice for gardens, allotments and construction sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFine wire that is easy to cut\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWire gauge describes the thickness of the wire, and the larger the number, the thinner the wire. At 19 gauge, the wire is approximately 1mm thick, compared with approximately 4.5mm for 6 gauge. That makes the sheets easy to handle and simple to snip to size with ordinary wire cutters. Wear gloves when handling or cutting the mesh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: cut edges and coating at the welds\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAny cut you make exposes bare steel, and that new metal may rust. Protect every cut end with galvanised spray or paint. Published information for this line is also not consistent on whether the galvanising is applied before or after welding. Where wire is galvanised before welding, the welding can remove a small amount of coating at the joints. Check the welds and touch up any bare spots. This is a light-gauge mesh; where a job needs stronger wire, a thicker gauge is the better choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe sheets are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmall animal hutches, pet cages and enclosures, from hamster cages up to wall panelling for chicken coops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAviaries and bird cages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePond covers and leaf protection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eClimbing plant support in gardens and on allotments\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmall mesh jobs on construction sites\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded wire mesh sheet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel wire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHot-dip galvanised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSheet size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.9m × 0.6m (3ft × 2ft)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire gauge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19 gauge (1.0mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHole sizes available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25mm × 25mm; 6mm × 6mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13mm × 13mm hole size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanising sequence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot confirmed for this line (published information differs)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSheet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoating weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth options share the same sheet size and the same 19 gauge wire, so the only choice is the hole size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e25mm × 25mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the more open mesh. It lets more light and air through, so it is a sensible choice for climbing plant support, pond and leaf covers, and enclosure panels where the animals kept are too large to fit through a 25mm hole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e6mm × 6mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the finer, closer mesh. Choose it where small animals must be kept in, or small pests kept out. As a rule of thumb, match the hole size to the smallest animal you need to contain or exclude, allowing for young animals. The 13mm × 13mm hole size is currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMeasure the opening, then cut the sheet to size with wire cutters, wearing gloves throughout. Treat each cut end with galvanised spray or paint before fitting. On timber frames and posts, fix the mesh with galvanised U staple nails. Where two sheets meet, join them with wire panel clips or cable ties. For plant supports, fix the sheet to timber posts. Check cut edges and fixing points from time to time and touch up any rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the sheets to a smaller size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The sheets are easy to handle and can be snipped to size. Wear gloves, and protect the cut ends with galvanised spray or paint, because exposed steel at a cut may rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow thick is 19 gauge wire?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e19 gauge wire is approximately 1mm thick. A higher gauge number means thinner wire, so this is a light mesh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the mesh suitable for outdoor use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The wire is hot-dip galvanised to help it resist corrosion and rust, and the sheets are commonly used in gardens and on allotments. Cut ends and any bare spots at the welds should be treated with galvanised spray or paint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the 13mm hole size available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The 13mm × 13mm hole size is currently unavailable. You can order the 25mm × 25mm or 6mm × 6mm options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSheets are priced per sheet as listed. A minimum order of 13 sheets applies, shown when you add to basket. We deliver to UK mainland addresses. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"6mm x 6mm","offer_id":63288210358659,"sku":"SSHF-106117-01","price":18.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"25mm x 25mm","offer_id":63288210391427,"sku":"SSHF-106117-02","price":14.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/small-galvanised-wire-mesh-sheet-rabbit-hutch-bb5122fe-e9a5-40d8-8b63-eabf683413cb.jpg?v=1794566717"},{"product_id":"plastic-deer-fencing-mesh-black-50mm-100m","title":"Plastic Deer Fencing Mesh, Black, 50mm Holes, 80gsm, UV Stabilised, 1.5m or 2m x 100m Roll","description":"\u003cp\u003eIf you need to keep deer off new planting, young trees or a fresh hedge line, this black plastic deer fencing mesh is a lighter, easier-to-handle alternative to metal wire deer fence. It is a heavy-duty netting made from high-tensile plastic that has been stretched during manufacture for extra strength, with 50mm square holes, a weight of 80g\/m² and UV stabilisation for outdoor use. It suits farmers, landscapers and gardeners. Each roll is 100m long, and you can buy it in 1.5m × 100m and 2m × 100m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStretched for strength\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe netting is made from high-tensile BOP plastic that is stretched during the manufacturing process. Stretching improves the strength and resilience of the filaments, which is why the mesh is considered suitable for use around larger animals such as deer. Tensile strength is stated as over 5.8kN\/m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBuilt for exposure\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe black netting is UV stabilised, so it is made to cope with long periods outdoors in sunlight and weather. It is described as having a long life expectancy when exposed to the elements. No figure in years is given, so treat that as a general expectation rather than a guarantee.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLight to carry, quick to put up\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause it is plastic rather than steel, the mesh is lightweight and easy to handle and erect. It fixes to ordinary timber posts or stakes with U-nails or nylon cable ties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe honest limitation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlastic netting does not hold itself taut the way a steel wire fence can. Straining line wires are strongly recommended to give the netting extra strength and keep the fence tight, and the taller 2m mesh may need a second or third line wire. For a long-term fence, battening is also recommended to spread the strain on individual filaments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is used as a barrier to fallow, roe, red and muntjac deer. Typical jobs include protecting newly planted crops and tree plantings, and guarding newly planted perimeter hedges on farmland against livestock damage. It is suitable for both commercial and domestic use, from farming through to plant protection in gardens.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeer control netting (heavy game netting)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-tensile strength BOP stretched plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV stabilised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMesh hole size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 × 50mm (approx. 2in square); one published figure gives 50 × 45mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight per area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80g\/m²\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOver 5.8kN\/m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable sizes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5m × 100m; 2m × 100m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eListed weight, 1.5m × 100m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eListed weight, 2m × 100m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m × 100m; 1.8m × 100m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected lifespan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRecommended post spacing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHeight is the main decision, because the roll length is the same 100m for both sizes. The 2m × 100m roll gives the taller barrier of the two and is the one to choose where you want the most height against deer. The 1.5m × 100m roll is lighter to carry and suits lower runs around new planting. Recommended fence heights for each deer species are not published for this line, so check local guidance if you are unsure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWork out the length of your fence line and divide by 100m to find how many rolls you need. Remember that the 2m mesh may need a second or third straining wire, which adds to the materials list. The 1.2m × 100m and 1.8m × 100m rolls are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet out a line of wooden fencing posts or timber stakes. Run a straining line wire along the top and keep it taut, then fix the netting to it with hog ring clips and hog ring pliers. On the 2m mesh, add a second or third line wire as needed. Fix the netting to each post or stake with U-nails or nylon cable ties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a fence that is meant to last, batten the netting: fix it between the posts or stakes and a length of treated timber running along them. This spreads the load across the mesh rather than concentrating it on a few filaments at each fixing point. Check the fence periodically and re-tension wires if they slacken.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need straining wire with this mesh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is strongly recommended. Straining line wire keeps the netting taut and gives it extra strength. It is fixed along the top with hog ring clips, and the 2m mesh may need a second or third wire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich deer will it keep out?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is described as an effective barrier to fallow, roe, red and muntjac deer when used as deer fencing. Results depend on height, tensioning and local deer pressure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I fix it straight to timber posts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. U-nails or nylon cable ties fix it to wooden posts or stakes. For a long-term fence, battening with treated timber is recommended because it spreads the strain on the netting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long will it last outdoors?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe netting is UV stabilised and described as having a long life expectancy when exposed to the elements. A specific lifespan or warranty period is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is priced per roll as listed. Choose 1.5m × 100m or 2m × 100m from the options. We deliver to UK mainland addresses. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"1.5m x 100m","offer_id":63288211308931,"sku":"SSHF-889311-01","price":180.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2m x 100m","offer_id":63288211341699,"sku":"SSHF-889311-02","price":292.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/black-plastic-deer-fencing-mesh-tree-planting-997920aa-4ce2-43ba-8a7a-04b1c95f55eb.jpg?v=1794566748"},{"product_id":"pvc-coated-border-fencing-green-10m-straight-arch-top","title":"PVC Coated Border Fencing, Green, 10m Rolls, Straight Top 0.9m or 1.2m, Arch Top 0.4m","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis green PVC-coated wire border fencing comes on 10m rolls in two styles, so you can pick the look and height that suits the job. The Straight Top style is a crimped rectangular mesh at 0.9m or 1.2m high, for low garden fences, vegetable patches and pet or animal enclosures. The Arch Top style is a 0.4m decorative edging with a looped top, for flower beds, lawn edges and grass walkways. In both styles the steel wire is galvanised and then coated in green PVC. It suits homeowners, gardeners, landscapers and grounds staff who want a tidy, low-maintenance border that blends into planting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGalvanised, then PVC coated\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth styles start with a galvanised steel wire core, which is then coated in green PVC. The coating gives an attractive, corrosion-resistant surface that sits quietly against grass and planting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCrimped mesh on the Straight Top\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Straight Top style has a rectangular mesh of 75mm × 100mm, and the wire is crimped. The crimped design gives the mesh additional strength compared with flat wire. The steel core is 1.6mm (16 gauge) before coating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHeavier wire on the Arch Top\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Arch Top style uses thicker wire. The vertical (warp) wires are 3.0mm in total with a 1.9mm steel core, and the woven-through (weft) wires are 3.5mm in total with a 2.4mm steel core. The base of the roll has wires that push into the ground, which makes it quick to set along a bed edge.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow its limits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is border and garden fencing. No security, stock-fence or load rating is published for either style, so it is not the product for a boundary that must keep out people or contain livestock. The Arch Top is a decorative edging at 0.4m high. Even with its ground wires, stakes are advised to keep the mesh taut and upright.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Straight Top style is used as a low garden fence, to define flower bed and vegetable patch borders, and for pet and animal enclosures and fencing. The Arch Top style is a decorative garden border for edging beds and lining grass walkways. Its arched top suits most domestic and commercial gardens.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStraight Top\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eArch Top\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSizes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.9m × 10m; 1.2m × 10m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.4m × 10m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop profile\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStraight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArched\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised steel, green PVC coated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised steel, green PVC coated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel core\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.6mm (16 gauge)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarp (vertical) 1.9mm; weft (woven) 2.4mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOverall wire thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarp 3.0mm; weft 3.5mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMesh size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75mm × 100mm rectangular\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConstruction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCrimped for additional strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWoven arch top; ground wires at base\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight per roll\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eListed weight 4.2kg (0.9m); 5.2kg (1.2m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 3.6kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoating thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected lifespan or guarantee\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with what the fence has to do. If you need a low fence, a border around a vegetable patch or an enclosure for pets or animals, choose the Straight Top. Take the 1.2m roll where you want more height. For a decorative edge along a flower bed, lawn or grass path, choose the Arch Top at 0.4m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThen work out quantity. Each roll is 10m long, so measure the full run, add a little for overlaps and corners, and divide by 10. With a minimum of 4 rolls per order, you have at least 40m to work with.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOn the Arch Top, push the wires at the base of the roll into the ground, then use stakes along the run to keep the mesh taut and upright. On the Straight Top, no specific fixing method is published; fix the mesh to posts or stakes suited to the height you are fencing. The listing is for the mesh roll only. The PVC coating needs no painting or treatment. Avoid scraping it with tools while fitting, so the corrosion-resistant surface stays intact.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo the two styles use the same wire?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Straight Top has a 1.6mm (16 gauge) steel core. The Arch Top uses thicker wire: 3.0mm overall with a 1.9mm core for the vertical wires, and 3.5mm overall with a 2.4mm core for the woven wires. Both are galvanised and coated in green PVC.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the Arch Top go in without stakes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe base wires push into the ground, but stakes are advised as well. They keep the mesh taut and upright.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for keeping pets in?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Straight Top style is listed for pet and animal enclosures and fencing, with a 75mm × 100mm mesh. Check that the mesh size and height suit your animal. The Arch Top is a decorative border and is not listed for enclosures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill it rust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel is galvanised and then PVC coated to give a corrosion-resistant surface. A lifespan or guarantee period is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe fencing is priced per roll as listed. A minimum order of 4 rolls applies, shown when you add to basket. We deliver to UK mainland addresses. The lead time is confirmed at checkout or on your order confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Straight Top \/ 0.9m x 10m","offer_id":63288214323587,"sku":"SSHF-597002-01","price":52.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Straight Top \/ 1.2m x 10m","offer_id":63288214356355,"sku":"SSHF-597002-02","price":56.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Arch Top \/ 0.4m x 10m","offer_id":63288214389123,"sku":"SSHF-597002-03","price":29.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-pvc-border-fencing-roll-on-lawn-b759ccc5-8483-40f1-aeca-3da5344889ee.jpg?v=1794566782"},{"product_id":"arris-rails-75x75mm-pressure-treated-green-brown","title":"Arris Rails 75 x 75mm, Pressure Treated Softwood, Green 1.8m to 3.6m or Brown 2.4m","description":"\u003cp\u003eArris rails are the horizontal rails of a closeboard or featheredge fence. Each rail is a 75mm × 75mm softwood section with a triangular profile and one slanted (arris cut) edge. The rails run between the posts, and featheredge boards are nailed to the flat face. These rails are pressure treated and rough sawn. Two colours are available: green treated in 1.8m, 2.4m, 3m and 3.6m lengths, and brown treated in 2.4m only. They suit fencing contractors, landscapers and anyone building or repairing a closeboard fence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA triangular section that sheds water\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe arris cut leaves a slanted top edge, so rain runs off the rail rather than sitting on it. The flat face provides a fixing surface for the boards, and the angled back keeps the rail compact between the posts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated for outdoor use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe softwood is pressure treated, which drives preservative into the timber to extend its life outdoors. Green and brown are the two treatment colours on offer; both serve the same purpose, and the choice is mainly about appearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA rigid frame for the boards\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFixed between the posts, the rails form the framework that holds featheredge boards in line and evenly spaced. Rails go in first, before any boards are fitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: treatment class and cut ends\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe treatment use class is not published for this line, so check that it suits your intended exposure, particularly where timber will be close to the ground. Any cut you make exposes untreated timber at the core; brush an end-grain preservative onto every cut end. The finish is rough sawn, so expect some variation in surface and dimensions, as is normal with sawn fencing timber.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eArris rails are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNew closeboard (featheredge) garden and boundary fences\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReplacing broken or rotten rails in an existing closeboard fence\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRebuilding fence runs where the posts are still sound\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFences fitted with gravel boards along the base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAgricultural and commercial boundaries built in closeboard style\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArris rail (triangular fence rail)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75mm × 75mm, triangular with slanted edge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThickness (as published)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e53mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRough sawn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen treated lengths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8m, 2.4m, 3m, 3.6m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrown treated lengths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.4m only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximate listed weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8m: 3kg; 2.4m: 3.5kg; 3m: 4kg; 3.6m: 5kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment use class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber grade or standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eColour.\u003c\/strong\u003e Green treated is the traditional fencing colour and is available in all four lengths. Brown treated is available in 2.4m only and suits fences where a brown finish is wanted to match existing posts or boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLength.\u003c\/strong\u003e Choose a length to suit your post spacing. Rails are usually cut to fit between posts, so pick a length that covers your bay with a little to spare, or one that can be cut cleanly into two bays to reduce waste. Longer rails are heavier and harder to handle on your own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many rails per bay.\u003c\/strong\u003e As general practice, two rails are used for fences up to about 1.2m high, and three rails for taller fences. Multiply the rails per bay by the number of bays to work out your total.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet the posts first. Arris rails are fixed either into mortices cut in the posts or onto the face of the posts with arris rail brackets. Fit the rails with the flat face towards the side where the boards will go, and keep the slanted edge on top so water runs off. Check each rail is level before fixing. Once all rails are in, nail the featheredge boards to the flat face, overlapping each board in the usual way. Use galvanised or other corrosion-resistant nails and fittings outdoors. Treat any cut ends with end-grain preservative. Inspect the rails from time to time, especially at the post joints, and re-treat as needed to help prolong their life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many rails do I need for my fence?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs general practice, use two rails per bay for fences up to about 1.2m high and three rails per bay for taller fences. Multiply by the number of bays in your run.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I repair a broken arris rail without replacing it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOften, yes. Arris rail repair brackets are commonly used to bridge a split or broken rail, or to reconnect a rail that has broken away from a post. Where a rail is badly rotted along its length, replacement is the better option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eShould I fix rails into mortices or with brackets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth methods are used. Mortices suit posts that are pre-cut or new posts where you can cut the slot. Arris rail brackets fix the rail to the face of the post and are a common choice for repairs and for posts without mortices.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the brown treated rail available in other lengths?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Brown treated is available in 2.4m only. Green treated is available in 1.8m, 2.4m, 3m and 3.6m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose your colour and length from the options. A minimum order of 20 rails applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout. Long lengths may need a suitable delivery vehicle, so please make sure there is clear access for unloading at your address.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green \/ 1.8m","offer_id":63288383111555,"sku":"SSHF-166590-01","price":8.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 2.4m","offer_id":63288383144323,"sku":"SSHF-166590-02","price":10.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 3m","offer_id":63288383177091,"sku":"SSHF-166590-03","price":12.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 3.6m","offer_id":63288383209859,"sku":"SSHF-166590-04","price":13.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ 2.4m","offer_id":63288383242627,"sku":"SSHF-166590-05","price":9.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-treated-arris-rails-yard-40e8a636-f1f3-4d5b-9e1c-50cd7d4815f2.jpg?v=1794568527"},{"product_id":"square-sawn-wooden-stakes-pointed-green-treated","title":"Square Sawn Wooden Stakes, Pointed, Green Treated Softwood, 750mm to 2.4m Long, 25mm to 50mm Square","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese square sawn wooden stakes are a simple, low-cost support for trees, shrubs, netting and setting-out work. Each stake is cut from softwood, sawn to a square section, pointed at one end and green treated to Use Class 3 (UC3). Stakes are sold individually in eight sizes, from 750mm × 25mm up to 2.4m × 50mm, and all eight are currently available. They suit gardeners, allotment holders, landscapers and anyone planting trees or hedging.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA pointed end for easier driving\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach stake is cut to a point at one end, so it can be knocked into prepared or soft ground with a mallet rather than needing a hole dug first. The square section gives flat faces to tie against and to strike squarely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated softwood\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe timber is treated with a wood preservative under vacuum pressure, which drives the preservative into the wood to help protect it against fungal decay, insect attack and rot caused by moisture. The treatment gives the stakes a green colour at first. Over time this fades to a honey brown and then to a silver grey; the colour change is normal weathering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA size for most small jobs\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe range runs from short, slim 25mm stakes for marking out and plant support to a 2.4m × 50mm stake for heavier staking. Lengths in between cover most tree, shrub and netting jobs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: UC3 is not a ground-contact class\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse Class 3 covers timber used outdoors above ground. It is not Use Class 4 (UC4), the class intended for timber in direct contact with the ground. Because these stakes are driven into soil, expect a shorter in-ground life than UC4 posts, particularly in wet or heavy ground. They are best suited to temporary and semi-permanent jobs, such as staking a young tree for its first few seasons. A specific service life is not published for this line. For permanent fencing, use UC4 posts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe stakes are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTree and sapling staking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHedge planting and supporting tree guards and shelters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlant and shrub support\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMarking out and setting-out pegs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTemporary fencing and netting supports\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVegetable garden canes and supports\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGeneral landscaping work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare sawn wooden stake\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treated, Use Class 3 (UC3)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen, weathering to brown then silver grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnd finish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePointed one end\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSizes available (length × square section)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e750mm × 25mm; 900mm × 25mm; 900mm × 32mm; 1.2m × 32mm; 1.35m × 32mm; 1.5m × 32mm; 1.8m × 32mm; 2.4m × 50mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndividual stakes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber species\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight per stake\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExpected service life\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll eight sizes share the same timber, treatment and pointed end, so the choice is length and section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e25mm section (750mm and 900mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e is the lightest option. It suits marking out, setting-out pegs, small plant supports and vegetable garden use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e32mm section (900mm to 1.8m)\u003c\/strong\u003e is the middle of the range. The shorter lengths suit shrubs, hedge planting and low netting; the 1.2m to 1.8m lengths suit young trees, tree guards and shelters, and temporary netting or fencing supports.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e50mm section (2.4m)\u003c\/strong\u003e is the heaviest stake in the range, for taller trees or jobs that need a stiffer support. As a rule of thumb, allow enough length to drive the stake firmly into the ground and still reach the height you need above it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrive the pointed end into the ground with a mallet or post driver, keeping the stake upright. In hard or stony ground, make a pilot hole with a metal bar first to avoid splitting the timber. When staking a tree, place the stake before planting where possible so the roots are not damaged, and use a proper tree tie rather than wire so the bark is not cut. If you cut a stake to length, treat the cut end with a suitable end-grain preservative. Wear gloves when handling treated timber and wash your hands afterwards. Check stakes at ground level from time to time and replace any that have softened.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre these stakes treated for ground contact?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. They are treated to UC3, which covers above-ground exterior use. UC4 is the ground-contact class. These stakes will still go into the ground, but expect a shorter life in soil than UC4 posts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy are the stakes green?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe green colour comes from the preservative treatment. It fades over time to a honey brown and then a silver grey as the timber weathers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre the stakes sold singly or in packs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThey are sold individually, with a minimum order quantity applied at checkout. See the ordering section below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich size should I use for a young tree?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor most young trees and saplings, a 1.2m to 1.8m stake in the 32mm section is a common choice. For taller trees, choose the 2.4m × 50mm stake.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStakes are priced per stake as listed. A minimum order of 55 stakes applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"750mm x 25mm x 25mm","offer_id":63288393236867,"sku":"SSHF-631766-01","price":1.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"900mm x 25mm x 25mm","offer_id":63288393269635,"sku":"SSHF-631766-02","price":2.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"900mm x 32mm x 32mm","offer_id":63288393302403,"sku":"SSHF-631766-03","price":2.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 32mm x 32mm","offer_id":63288393335171,"sku":"SSHF-631766-04","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.35m x 32mm x 32mm","offer_id":63288393367939,"sku":"SSHF-631766-05","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.5m x 32mm x 32mm","offer_id":63288393400707,"sku":"SSHF-631766-06","price":4.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m x 32mm x 32mm","offer_id":63288393433475,"sku":"SSHF-631766-07","price":5.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m x 50mm x 50mm","offer_id":63288393466243,"sku":"SSHF-631766-08","price":5.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/square-sawn-tree-stakes-planting-site-ff9ac936-fda3-4233-b214-0fac342cec07.jpg?v=1794568573"},{"product_id":"pvc-coated-welded-wire-mesh-rolls-green-black","title":"PVC Coated Welded Wire Mesh Rolls, Green or Black, 0.6m to 1.8m High, 10m to 30m Long, 13mm to 50mm Holes","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese PVC-coated welded wire mesh rolls are made for garden, allotment and animal enclosure fencing where a softer, coloured finish suits better than bare metal. The steel wire is galvanised, welded into a fixed grid, then coated in PVC. Rolls come in green or black, in heights from 0.6m to 1.8m and lengths from 10m to 30m, with hole sizes from 13mm × 13mm up to 50mm × 50mm and wire gauges from 19 gauge (1.0mm) to 10 gauge (3.0mm). They suit gardeners, allotment holders, poultry and small animal keepers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWelded at every join\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe wires are welded where they cross, so each hole keeps its shape and the mesh does not slip or unravel when cut. Supplied as a roll, it is easier to transport than panels: unroll it along the line of the fence and cut to length as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo layers of protection\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel is galvanised with a zinc coating to help it resist rust, and the PVC coating then adds a second layer that protects the wire from the weather. The plastic also smooths over sharp bits of metal, giving a finish that is kinder to animals and hands than bare galvanised wire.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA finish that blends in\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGreen helps the mesh sit quietly against hedges, lawns and planting. Black is available in a smaller range of sizes for a darker, more discreet look.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: cut ends and the right gauge\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe wire is galvanised before welding and coating. Any cut exposes bare steel, and that new metal may rust, so protect every cut end with galvanised spray or paint. Light gauges such as 19 or 17 gauge are not intended to hold back strong or determined animals; for dogs, choose a heavier gauge, such as 12 gauge or thicker. Coating thickness is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rolls are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGarden and allotment fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eChicken runs and poultry pens\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDog runs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRabbit and small animal enclosures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAviaries\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFruit cages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTree and plant protection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBoundary fencing on posts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelded wire mesh roll, PVC coated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel wire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised before welding, then PVC coated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen; Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeights\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.6m, 0.9m, 1.2m, 1.5m, 1.8m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll lengths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10m, 15m, 25m, 30m (depending on option)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHole sizes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13mm × 13mm; 25mm × 13mm; 25mm × 25mm; 50mm × 50mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire gauges\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19g (1.0mm), 17g (1.4mm), 16g (1.6mm), 15g (1.75mm), 14g (1.9mm), 12g (2.5mm), 10g (3.0mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbout 8kg (light 10m rolls) to 79kg (1.8m × 25m, 10 gauge)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack 1.2m × 25m, 25mm × 25mm, 14 gauge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoating thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot every combination of colour, size, hole and gauge exists, so choose in this order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eColour.\u003c\/strong\u003e Green covers 19 combinations, from 0.6m × 25m to 1.8m × 25m. Black is offered as 0.9m × 25m in 25mm × 25mm or 50mm × 50mm, and 1.2m × 25m in 50mm × 50mm, all in 14 gauge. The black 1.2m × 25m, 25mm × 25mm, 14 gauge roll is currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHole size.\u003c\/strong\u003e 13mm × 13mm (0.6m × 25m, 19 gauge) and 25mm × 13mm (1.2m × 10m, 19 gauge) are the finest meshes for small animals, birds and plant protection. 25mm × 25mm suits small animal enclosures, rabbit runs and chicken runs. 50mm × 50mm is the open mesh for larger animals such as dogs and for general boundary fencing. Match the hole to the smallest animal you need to contain or keep out, allowing for young animals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGauge.\u003c\/strong\u003e A lower gauge number means thicker wire. 19 and 17 gauge are light and easy to cut; 15 and 14 gauge are mid-weight; 12 and 10 gauge are the heaviest, for dog runs and fencing that takes more pressure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet timber or other suitable posts first. Unroll the mesh along the fence line, pull it reasonably taut and fix it to the posts with galvanised U staple nails. On longer runs, a straining line wire along the top and bottom helps keep the mesh tight. Cut with wire cutters, wearing gloves throughout, and treat every cut end with galvanised spray or paint. Heavier rolls, particularly the 10 gauge and 1.8m options, need two people to lift and unroll safely. Check fixings and cut ends from time to time and touch up any rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich gauge should I choose for a dog run?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose a heavier gauge, such as 12 gauge (2.5mm) or 10 gauge (3.0mm), usually with 50mm × 50mm holes. Lighter gauges are better suited to small animals and garden use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the roll to length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Cut it with wire cutters while wearing gloves, then protect the cut ends with galvanised spray or paint, because exposed steel at a cut may rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow heavy are the rolls?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRoll weights range from about 8kg for light 10m rolls to 79kg for the 1.8m × 25m, 10 gauge roll. Heavier rolls need two people to handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs every size available in black?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Black is offered in three combinations, all 14 gauge and 25m long. The black 1.2m × 25m, 25mm × 25mm roll is currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRolls are sold individually, and no minimum order applies to this product. Choose your colour, roll size and mesh (hole size and wire gauge) before adding to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green \/ 0.6m x 25m \/ 13mm x 13mm, 19 Gauge (1.0mm)","offer_id":63288440291715,"sku":"SSHF-497821-01","price":150.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 0.9m x 10m \/ 25mm x 25mm, 15 Gauge (1.75mm)","offer_id":63288440324483,"sku":"SSHF-497821-02","price":120.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 0.9m x 10m \/ 25mm x 25mm, 17 Gauge (1.4mm)","offer_id":63288440357251,"sku":"SSHF-497821-03","price":72.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 0.9m x 10m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63288440390019,"sku":"SSHF-497821-04","price":128.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 0.9m x 25m \/ 25mm x 25mm, 14 Gauge (1.9mm)","offer_id":63288440422787,"sku":"SSHF-497821-05","price":288.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 0.9m x 25m \/ 25mm x 25mm, 17 Gauge (1.4mm)","offer_id":63288440455555,"sku":"SSHF-497821-06","price":192.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 0.9m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 10 Gauge (3.0mm)","offer_id":63288440488323,"sku":"SSHF-497821-07","price":420.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 0.9m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 14 Gauge (1.9mm)","offer_id":63288440521091,"sku":"SSHF-497821-08","price":262.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.2m x 10m \/ 25mm x 13mm, 19 Gauge (1.0mm)","offer_id":63288440553859,"sku":"SSHF-497821-09","price":72.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.2m x 15m \/ 25mm x 25mm, 15 Gauge (1.75mm)","offer_id":63288440586627,"sku":"SSHF-497821-10","price":212.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.2m x 25m \/ 25mm x 25mm, 14 Gauge (1.9mm)","offer_id":63288440619395,"sku":"SSHF-497821-11","price":426.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.2m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 10 Gauge (3.0mm)","offer_id":63288440652163,"sku":"SSHF-497821-12","price":550.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.2m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 14 Gauge (1.9mm)","offer_id":63288440684931,"sku":"SSHF-497821-13","price":288.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.2m x 30m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 15 Gauge (1.75mm)","offer_id":63288440717699,"sku":"SSHF-497821-14","price":216.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.5m x 10m \/ 25mm x 25mm, 15 Gauge (1.75mm)","offer_id":63288440750467,"sku":"SSHF-497821-15","price":168.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.5m x 10m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 12 Gauge (2.5mm)","offer_id":63288440783235,"sku":"SSHF-497821-16","price":172.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.5m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 15 Gauge (1.75mm)","offer_id":63288440816003,"sku":"SSHF-497821-17","price":184.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.8m x 10m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 16 Gauge (1.6mm)","offer_id":63288440848771,"sku":"SSHF-497821-18","price":108.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ 1.8m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 10 Gauge (3.0mm)","offer_id":63288440881539,"sku":"SSHF-497821-19","price":792.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Black \/ 0.9m x 25m \/ 25mm x 25mm, 14 Gauge (1.9mm)","offer_id":63288440914307,"sku":"SSHF-497821-20","price":300.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Black \/ 0.9m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 14 Gauge (1.9mm)","offer_id":63288440947075,"sku":"SSHF-497821-21","price":238.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Black \/ 1.2m x 25m \/ 50mm x 50mm, 14 Gauge (1.9mm)","offer_id":63288440979843,"sku":"SSHF-497821-22","price":288.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-pvc-coated-welded-mesh-roll-chicken-run-89f1ea9e-b55c-4f3b-80d5-1a9d31708c66.jpg?v=1794568810"},{"product_id":"green-pvc-coated-wire-fencing-mesh-100x75mm-25m","title":"Green PVC Coated Wire Fencing Mesh, 100 x 75mm Openings, 25m Rolls, 0.9m, 1.2m or 1.8m High","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis green PVC coated wire fencing mesh is a general-purpose garden fencing roll for boundaries, allotments, pet runs and plant protection. Each roll is 25m long and the mesh has rectangular 100mm × 75mm (4in × 3in) openings. It is made from galvanised steel wire with a green PVC coating, and three heights are available to buy: 0.9m, 1.2m and 1.8m. It is fixed to timber or metal posts and suits gardeners, allotment holders, pet owners and smallholders.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo layers of protection on the wire\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel wire is galvanised and then covered with a green PVC coating. Galvanising gives the steel a protective layer that helps it resist rust and corrosion, and the plastic coating adds a second barrier over the top. This combination is a common choice for garden and boundary fencing that stays outdoors all year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA green finish that sits quietly in the garden\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe green coating is less noticeable against hedges, lawns and planting than bare metal. That makes the mesh a practical option where you want a boundary or a barrier without a fence that dominates the view.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA light, flexible roll that is easy to handle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe core wire is approximately 1.6mm in diameter, or approximately 2.1mm including the PVC coating. The mesh is light and flexible enough to unroll, carry and fix to posts without specialist equipment, and the 100mm × 75mm openings keep it open to light and views.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: a light mesh, not a security fence\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a light-gauge garden mesh. It will keep pets in and larger animals out, but the 100mm × 75mm openings are too large to stop small animals such as rabbits, young poultry or rodents getting through, so use a finer mesh where that matters. It is not designed to resist climbing or deliberate damage. Any cut through the coating exposes the steel underneath, and the method used to join the wires is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh is typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGarden boundary fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAllotment fencing and plot divisions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKeeping pets in and larger animals out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlant protection around beds, borders and vegetable patches\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLining post and rail fences\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGeneral garden fencing fixed to timber or metal posts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVC coated wire fencing mesh, supplied in rolls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised steel wire with PVC coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeights available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.9m; 1.2m; 1.8m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpening size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100mm × 75mm (4in × 3in), rectangular\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCore wire diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 1.6mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire diameter including coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 2.1mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 15.5kg (0.9m), 20.6kg (1.2m), 30.5kg (1.8m); published figures differ, so treat as a guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire joining method\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoating thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll three options share the same 25m roll length, the same 100mm × 75mm openings and the same wire, so the only choice is the height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e0.9m\u003c\/strong\u003e suits low garden borders, vegetable beds, plant protection and lining low post and rail fences. It is also the lightest roll to handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1.2m\u003c\/strong\u003e is a middle height for allotment boundaries, pet runs and general garden fencing where a waist-high barrier is enough.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1.8m\u003c\/strong\u003e is the tallest option, for full-height boundary fencing and for keeping larger dogs or animals in or out. It is the heaviest roll, so allow for two people when handling and tensioning it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo work out how many rolls you need, measure the full run of the fence and divide by 25m, rounding up and allowing a little extra for corners and overlaps.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet your timber or metal posts first, spaced evenly along the line of the fence. Unroll the mesh along the posts, pull it reasonably taut and fix it to timber posts with galvanised staples. On metal posts, use suitable wire ties or clips. For longer runs, running line wire between the posts and tying the mesh to it helps keep the fence straight. Wear gloves when handling and cutting the mesh. Where you cut the roll, protect the exposed ends to reduce the risk of rust. Check the fence from time to time and refix any loose staples or ties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long is each roll?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery roll is 25m long, whichever height you choose. Measure your fence line and order enough rolls to cover the full run.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill it keep rabbits out?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot reliably. The 100mm × 75mm openings are large enough for rabbits and other small animals to pass through. For rabbits, choose a finer mesh, or add a finer mesh along the lower part of the fence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the mesh suitable for outdoor use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The steel wire is galvanised and PVC coated to help it resist rust and corrosion, and it is intended for outdoor garden and boundary fencing. Protect any cut ends, because cutting exposes the steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the roll to length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The wire can be cut with ordinary wire cutters. Wear gloves, and treat the cut ends to reduce the risk of rust at those points.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRolls are sold individually and no minimum order applies, so you can order the exact number of rolls your fence needs. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"0.9m x 25m","offer_id":63288789991811,"sku":"SSHF-681489-01","price":168.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m x 25m","offer_id":63288790024579,"sku":"SSHF-681489-02","price":210.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m x 25m","offer_id":63288790057347,"sku":"SSHF-681489-03","price":260.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-pvc-wire-fencing-mesh-roll-allotment-e722c220-6797-42b2-b750-b0aa194ded68.jpg?v=1794571547"},{"product_id":"heavy-grade-galvanised-stock-fencing-50m-l-series","title":"Heavy Grade Galvanised Stock Fencing, 50m Rolls, L9\/120\/15, L16\/100\/15 or L23\/200\/15","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis heavy grade stock fencing is a hinge-joint woven field fence for farm boundaries, livestock paddocks and woodland protection. It is made from hot-dip galvanised steel wire and supplied in 50m rolls. Three specifications are available to buy now: L9\/120\/15 (1.2m high), L16\/100\/15 (1.0m high) and L23\/200\/15 (2.0m high). The L20\/145\/15 (1.45m high) specification is currently unavailable. It suits farmers, smallholders, landowners, fencing contractors and woodland managers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA woven hinge-joint mesh\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHorizontal line wires are joined by vertical stay wires, with the stays wrapped or knotted around each line wire where they cross. In general, this type of joint lets the mesh give when an animal leans or pushes against it, then return towards its original shape once the pressure is removed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCloser wires at the bottom\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe horizontal line wires are spaced closer together near the ground and further apart towards the top. Small and young animals tend to test a fence low down, so the tighter spacing at the base helps to keep them in, while the wider spacing higher up keeps the roll weight down.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eReading the specification code\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStock fencing in the UK is usually described by a three-part code. By general industry convention, the first number is the number of horizontal line wires, the second is the fence height in centimetres and the third is the spacing between the vertical stays in centimetres. So L9\/120\/15 has 9 line wires, stands 120cm high and has stays every 15cm. The \"L\" prefix is commonly used in the UK for heavy grade specifications. This is a naming convention, not a certification for this product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: wire diameter not confirmed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe wire diameters for this line are not published. Some published listings for this line show \"15 Gauge (1.75mm)\", but that figure appears to repeat the 15cm stay spacing and conflicts with the wire sizes usually found in heavy grade fencing. If wire diameter or tensile strength matters for your job, confirm it with us before ordering. Like any wire fence, it only performs as well as its posts, strainers and tension.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis fencing is typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCattle and general stock boundaries (L9\/120\/15)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSheep, lambs, pigs and smaller animals (L16\/100\/15)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDeer fencing and high-security livestock boundaries (L23\/200\/15)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eForestry, new planting and woodland protection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFarm field boundaries and paddock divisions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHinge-joint (knotted) woven field fence\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDescribed as heavy grade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel wire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHot-dip galvanised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eL9\/120\/15\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9 line wires, 1.2m high, 15cm stays, roll weight about 26kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eL16\/100\/15\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 line wires, 1.0m high, 15cm stays, roll weight about 32kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eL23\/200\/15\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23 line wires, 2.0m high, 15cm stays, roll weight about 48kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eL20\/145\/15 (1.45m high)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLine wire spacing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGraduated, closer at the bottom\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire diameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile grade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoating weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll three specifications share the same 50m roll length and 15cm stay spacing. The choice comes down to height and how many line wires you need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eL9\/120\/15\u003c\/strong\u003e is the general-purpose choice for cattle and mixed stock. At 1.2m with 9 line wires, it is the lightest roll in the range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eL16\/100\/15\u003c\/strong\u003e is lower at 1.0m but has 16 line wires, so the mesh is much closer. Choose it for sheep, lambs, pigs and smaller animals that might push through a wider mesh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eL23\/200\/15\u003c\/strong\u003e stands 2.0m high with 23 line wires. It is intended for deer, high-security livestock boundaries and woodland protection where animals may try to jump a lower fence. The L20\/145\/15 is currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGeneral practice is to set strainer posts at each end of a run, at corners and at changes of direction, with struts to brace them against the pull of the wire. Intermediate posts are spaced along the run between strainers. Unroll the fence with the closer-spaced wires at the bottom, attach it to the first strainer, then tension it evenly with a fence strainer or tensioning tool before tying off at the far strainer. Fix the mesh to timber posts with galvanised staples, leaving the wires free to move slightly. A plain or barbed top wire is often run above the mesh. Check tension and fixings from time to time and treat any cut ends with galvanised spray or paint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does L9\/120\/15 mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy general convention, it means 9 horizontal line wires, a height of 120cm and vertical stays every 15cm. The \"L\" is commonly used in the UK to indicate a heavy grade specification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat wire diameter is used?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWire diameters are not published for this line. The \"15 Gauge (1.75mm)\" figure shown in some published listings appears to be an error, so please confirm the diameter with us before ordering if it matters for your job.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the L20\/145\/15 available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The L20\/145\/15 (1.45m high) specification is currently unavailable. You can order the L9\/120\/15, L16\/100\/15 or L23\/200\/15.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow heavy are the rolls?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAbout 26kg for L9\/120\/15, 32kg for L16\/100\/15 and 48kg for L23\/200\/15. Plan for two people or machinery to move and unroll them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRolls are sold individually and no minimum order applies. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout. The rolls are heavy, so plan for two-person handling or suitable machinery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"L9\/120\/15 - 1.2m x 50m","offer_id":63288804901251,"sku":"SSHF-800766-01","price":238.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"L16\/100\/15 - 1.0m x 50m","offer_id":63288804934019,"sku":"SSHF-800766-02","price":334.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"L23\/200\/15 - 2.0m x 50m","offer_id":63288804966787,"sku":"SSHF-800766-03","price":500.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/stock-fencing-roll-field-gateway-28f7a388-708d-4658-a2fa-3e2e9389233c.jpg?v=1794571585"},{"product_id":"picket-fence-pales-pressure-treated-round-pointed-top","title":"Picket Fence Pales, Pressure Treated, Green or Brown, Round or Pointed Top, 900mm or 1200mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese picket fence pales are individual pressure treated softwood boards for building a traditional picket fence or repairing an existing one. Each pale is approximately 75mm wide and 22mm thick, cut to length with a shaped top. You can choose a green or brown treatment colour, a round top or pointed top, and a height of 900mm or 1200mm. Six combinations are available to buy now; two are currently unavailable. They suit homeowners, gardeners and fencers putting up low, open boundaries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePre-cut and ready to fix\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach pale arrives cut to height with its top already shaped, so there is no need to mark out and cut the profile on site. Fixed to rails, they form the familiar open picket pattern.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated softwood\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe timber is pressure treated, a process that drives preservative into the wood to help it resist rot and insect attack outdoors. The supplier describes the timber as slow-grown European Redwood. The treatment colour, green or brown, will fade over time and the pales will weather to a silver or grey shade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSold individually, so you buy what you need\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause the pales are sold one at a time, you can work out the exact number for a run of fence, or order a smaller quantity to replace broken or rotten pales on a fence you already have, subject to the minimum order below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: a decorative boundary, not a security fence\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA picket fence marks a boundary and helps keep children and pets in, but at 900mm or 1200mm with open gaps it is not designed to stop a determined climber or provide privacy. Sizes are nominal and sawn timber can vary slightly, and like all timber the pales may move, check or split as they dry and weather. Any cut you make exposes untreated wood, which should be treated before fitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe pales are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFront garden picket fences\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCottage-style boundaries and low divisions between gardens\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVegetable garden and border edging fences\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlay area surrounds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReplacing broken pales on existing picket fences\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePicket fence pale, sold individually\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treated softwood (described by the supplier as slow-grown European Redwood)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 75mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 22mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeights\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e900mm; 1200mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop styles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound Top; Pointed Top\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment colours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen; Brown\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSawn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable now\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen Round Top 900mm; Green Round Top 1200mm; Green Pointed Top 900mm; Brown Round Top 1200mm; Brown Pointed Top 900mm; Brown Pointed Top 1200mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrown Round Top 900mm; Green Pointed Top 1200mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment use class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight per pale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll options share the same approximate 75mm × 22mm section, so the choice comes down to colour, top style and height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTreatment colour.\u003c\/strong\u003e Green is the traditional look for treated garden timber. Brown gives a darker, more natural wood tone. Both fade with weathering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTop style.\u003c\/strong\u003e Round Top gives a softer, cottage-style outline. Pointed Top gives a sharper, more traditional picket profile. If you are repairing an existing fence, match the top style already in place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight.\u003c\/strong\u003e 900mm suits low front garden boundaries, edging and border fences. 1200mm gives a taller boundary and is often chosen for play area surrounds and where pets need to be contained.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrown Round Top 900mm and Green Pointed Top 1200mm are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet posts at regular intervals along the line of the fence and fix two horizontal rails between them, one towards the top and one towards the bottom of the pales. Fix each pale to both rails with galvanised nails or screws. Use a spacer block cut to your chosen gap, commonly about one pale width or less, to keep the spacing even along the run. Keep the bottom of each pale clear of the ground so it does not sit in standing water or wet soil. If you cut a pale to length, treat the cut end with a suitable end-grain preservative before fixing. Check the fence periodically and replace damaged pales.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many pales do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd the pale width (about 75mm) to your chosen gap, then divide the length of the fence by that figure. For example, with a 75mm gap each pale and gap takes up about 150mm, so a 1.5m run needs around 10 pales. Allow a few extra for cuts and spares.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I paint or stain the pales?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Once the treated timber has dried out, the pales can be painted or stained with a product suitable for exterior timber. Follow the coating maker's instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the colour last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The green or brown treatment colour fades over time and the timber weathers to a silver or grey shade. This is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre all combinations available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Brown Round Top 900mm and Green Pointed Top 1200mm are currently unavailable. The other six combinations can be ordered now.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePales are priced per pale as listed. A minimum order of 69 pales applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green \/ Round Top \/ 900mm","offer_id":63288808210819,"sku":"SSHF-434348-01","price":2.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ Round Top \/ 1200mm","offer_id":63288808243587,"sku":"SSHF-434348-02","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ Pointed Top \/ 900mm","offer_id":63288808276355,"sku":"SSHF-434348-03","price":2.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ Round Top \/ 1200mm","offer_id":63288808309123,"sku":"SSHF-434348-04","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ Pointed Top \/ 900mm","offer_id":63288808341891,"sku":"SSHF-434348-05","price":2.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ Pointed Top \/ 1200mm","offer_id":63288808374659,"sku":"SSHF-434348-06","price":3.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-round-top-picket-fence-front-garden-816f2330-4f37-4f71-9324-901a705a960e.jpg?v=1794571633"},{"product_id":"chain-link-fencing-galvanised-green-pvc-coated-50mm","title":"Chain Link Fencing, 50mm Diamond Mesh, Galvanised or Green PVC Coated, 0.9m to 1.8m High, 10m or 25m Rolls","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis chain link fencing is a woven steel wire mesh with 50mm (2in) diamond-shaped holes, supplied in rolls for boundary, security and enclosure work. It comes in two finishes: plain galvanised and green PVC coated. Choose the finish, the size (height × roll length) and the wire thickness. Some sizes are currently unavailable, as shown below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA woven diamond mesh\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChain link is made by weaving wires together so that each wire links with its neighbours to form a continuous diamond pattern. The 50mm diamond gives a clear view through the fence while forming a physical barrier. Being woven, the mesh is flexible enough to roll out, tension along posts and cut to length on site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo finishes for different settings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe galvanised finish has a zinc coating that helps the steel resist rust and corrosion, and it gives a plain metal look. The PVC coated finish is galvanised steel wire covered with a green PVC layer, which the supplier states helps protect against UV degradation, rust and corrosion. Green tends to blend in with hedges, grass and planting. The galvanised mesh is made in Britain to BS EN standards, as stated by the manufacturer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWire thickness to suit the job\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe wire is listed at 2.5mm or 3.15mm. The supplier describes 2.5mm wire as suitable for general domestic uses such as dog enclosures, and suggests a heavier wire for larger or stronger dogs. Thicker wire generally gives a stiffer, more robust mesh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: coated wire sizes and cut ends\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor PVC coated chain link, the listed wire thickness is commonly the overall diameter including the coating, so the steel core inside is thinner. The core diameter is Not published for this line. Do not compare a coated 2.5mm wire directly with a galvanised 2.5mm wire. Cutting the mesh exposes bare steel at the cut ends, which may rust, and chain link on its own is not a high-security fence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChain link fencing is typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSecurity and boundary fencing for homes, farms and commercial sites\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSports grounds and tennis courts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSchools and parks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAnimal enclosures and dog runs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAllotments and garden boundaries\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCommercial and industrial yards\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChain link fencing (woven diamond mesh), supplied in rolls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel wire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinishes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised; green PVC coated over galvanised wire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMesh size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50mm (2in) diamond\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised, available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m × 25m, 3.15mm wire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVC coated, available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.9m × 10m, 2.5mm; 0.9m × 25m, 2.5mm; 1.2m × 10m, 2.5mm; 1.5m × 25m, 2.5mm; 1.5m × 25m, 3.15mm; 1.8m × 25m, 2.5mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised 0.9m × 25m and 1.8m × 25m in 2.5mm; PVC coated 0.9m, 1.2m and 1.8m × 25m in 3.15mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVC wire size basis\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCommonly the overall coated diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVC core wire diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard (galvanised)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMade in Britain to BS EN standards, as stated by the manufacturer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard (PVC coated)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFinish:\u003c\/strong\u003e choose galvanised for a plain, practical metal finish, or green PVC coated where the fence will be on show or should blend into planting. Galvanised is currently available in 1.2m × 25m only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeight:\u003c\/strong\u003e 0.9m suits low garden boundaries and small animal runs. 1.2m is a common general boundary height. 1.5m and 1.8m suit dog runs, sports areas and boundaries where people should not easily step or climb over.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRoll length:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10m rolls suit short runs and repairs; 25m rolls reduce joins on longer runs. Measure the run and allow extra for joins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWire:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2.5mm suits general domestic use. Choose 3.15mm where a heavier mesh is wanted, for example for larger dogs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs general good practice, use concrete or steel posts, with straining posts at the ends, corners and changes of direction. The supplier recommends post spacing of 2.5m to 3m, depending on ground conditions and local requirements. Run straining wire along the top, middle and bottom of the fence and tension it with wire tensioners. Fix the end of the mesh to the straining posts with tension bars threaded through the diamonds, then tie the mesh to each line wire with wire ties at regular intervals. Tension the mesh evenly so it does not sag in wind. Wear gloves, as cut wire ends are sharp, and treat any exposed steel with galvanised paint or spray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the holes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mesh has 50mm (2in) diamond-shaped holes on every option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the PVC coated wire as thick as the galvanised wire?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot necessarily. The listed PVC thickness is commonly the overall coated diameter, so the steel core is thinner. The core diameter is Not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich wire thickness should I choose for a dog run?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier describes 2.5mm wire as suitable for general domestic uses such as dog enclosures and suggests heavier wire for larger or stronger dogs. Where 3.15mm is available in your size, it gives a heavier mesh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy are some sizes not available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGalvanised 0.9m × 25m and 1.8m × 25m in 2.5mm, and PVC coated 0.9m, 1.2m and 1.8m × 25m in 3.15mm, are currently unavailable. The other options listed above can be ordered now.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRolls are sold individually and no minimum order applies. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout. Rolls are heavy, so allow two people to unload, carry and unroll them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Galvanised \/ 1.2m x 25m \/ 3.15mm","offer_id":63288812929411,"sku":"SSHF-249667-01","price":459.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green PVC Coated \/ 0.9m x 10m \/ 2.5mm","offer_id":63288812962179,"sku":"SSHF-249667-02","price":144.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green PVC Coated \/ 0.9m x 25m \/ 2.5mm","offer_id":63288812994947,"sku":"SSHF-249667-03","price":224.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green PVC Coated \/ 1.2m x 10m \/ 2.5mm","offer_id":63288813027715,"sku":"SSHF-249667-04","price":163.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green PVC Coated \/ 1.5m x 25m \/ 2.5mm","offer_id":63288813060483,"sku":"SSHF-249667-05","price":334.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green PVC Coated \/ 1.5m x 25m \/ 3.15mm","offer_id":63288813093251,"sku":"SSHF-249667-06","price":480.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green PVC Coated \/ 1.8m x 25m \/ 2.5mm","offer_id":63288813126019,"sku":"SSHF-249667-07","price":390.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/pvc-coated-chain-link-roll-playing-field-ece77869-b3ae-417c-956a-1412fb8f466a.jpg?v=1794571684"},{"product_id":"galvanised-chicken-wire-hexagonal-mesh-rolls","title":"Galvanised Chicken Wire, Hexagonal Mesh, 25mm, 31mm or 50mm Holes, 0.6m to 1.8m High, 10m to 50m Rolls","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis galvanised chicken wire is a hexagonal wire netting supplied on rolls, made by twisting steel wire into a flexible mesh of six-sided holes. It is available in heights from 0.6m to 1.8m, roll lengths of 10m, 25m and 50m, and hole sizes of 25mm, 31mm and 50mm, though not every combination is offered. It suits poultry keepers, gardeners, allotment holders and anyone building runs, cages or plant protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFlexible twisted hexagonal mesh\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach hole is formed by twisting neighbouring wires together rather than welding them. This gives the netting its familiar hexagonal pattern and makes it flexible, so it can be unrolled, bent around corners, shaped over frames and cut to length with ordinary wire cutters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGalvanised steel for outdoor use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel wire is hot-dip galvanised with a zinc coating to help it resist rust and corrosion outdoors. The wire is galvanised before it is twisted, so the coating runs along the full length of each strand, including at the twists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLight wire that is easy to handle\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWire gauge describes thickness: the higher the number, the thinner the wire. Rolls with 25mm holes use 22 gauge (0.7mm) wire, rolls with 50mm holes use 20 gauge (0.9mm) wire, and the 1.8m high rolls use a heavier 19 gauge (1.0mm) wire. A wire gauge for the 31mm hole size is not published for this line. Supplied on rolls, the netting is straightforward to carry and handle on site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: not a fox-proof barrier\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChicken wire is designed to keep birds and small animals in, or keep them out of beds and crops. It is a light netting, and on its own it is not a predator-proof barrier: a determined fox can bite through or push past it. Where foxes are a risk, use a heavier welded wire mesh for the run. Cut ends also expose bare steel, which may develop surface rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe netting is typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eChicken and poultry runs, coops and small animal enclosures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRabbit fencing around gardens, beds and allotment plots\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGarden and allotment plant protection from birds and browsing animals\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFruit cages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePond covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompost bins and leaf enclosures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCraft and garden projects that need a shapeable mesh\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHexagonal wire netting (twisted hex mesh) on rolls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel wire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHot-dip galvanised (zinc coating), galvanised before twisting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeights\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.6m, 0.9m, 1.2m, 1.35m, 1.8m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll lengths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10m, 25m, 50m (depending on height and hole size)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHole sizes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25mm, 31mm, 50mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire gauge, 25mm hole\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22 gauge (0.7mm); 19 gauge (1.0mm) on the 1.8m roll\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire gauge, 50mm hole\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 gauge (0.9mm); 19 gauge (1.0mm) on the 1.8m roll\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire gauge, 31mm hole\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m × 25m 31mm; 1.35m × 25m 31mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the hole size first, then the height and roll length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e25mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the finest mesh. It keeps out small birds and young chicks and suits aviaries. Available in 0.6m, 0.9m and 1.2m heights in 10m, 25m and 50m rolls, plus 1.8m × 25m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e31mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the traditional rabbit-netting size. Available as 0.6m × 50m, 1.2m × 50m and 1.35m × 50m. The 1.2m × 25m and 1.35m × 25m rolls are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e50mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the most open mesh and suits poultry runs and plant protection. Available in 0.6m, 0.9m and 1.2m heights in 10m, 25m and 50m rolls, plus 1.8m × 50m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor height, allow for any netting you plan to bury or turn out at the base, and for the jumping or climbing ability of the animals involved. Shorter rolls suit small runs and repairs; 50m rolls suit longer runs of fencing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnroll the netting along the line of the fence and fix it to timber or metal posts with staples, U-nails, cable ties or fencing clips. For animal enclosures, tension the mesh well and fix it securely at regular intervals so there are no loose sections or gaps at the base. A straining wire along the top and bottom helps keep longer runs taut. Cut to length with wire cutters, wearing gloves. Treat cut ends with galvanised spray or paint, and check the netting and fixings from time to time for damage or rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill chicken wire keep foxes out?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot on its own. It keeps poultry in and smaller animals out, but it is not a predator-proof barrier. Where foxes are a risk, use a heavier welded wire mesh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich hole size is best for rabbits?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e31mm is the traditional rabbit-netting size. Check which heights and lengths are currently available before ordering, as two 25m rolls in this size are unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the netting to size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It cuts easily with wire cutters. Wear gloves, and protect the cut ends with galvanised spray or paint, as exposed steel may develop surface rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat gauge is the wire?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e22 gauge (0.7mm) for 25mm holes, 20 gauge (0.9mm) for 50mm holes, and 19 gauge (1.0mm) for the 1.8m rolls. The gauge for the 31mm hole size is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe netting is priced per roll as listed. A minimum order of 4 rolls applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"0.6m \/ 10m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288822989187,"sku":"SSHF-752370-01","price":14.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m \/ 10m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823021955,"sku":"SSHF-752370-02","price":10.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m \/ 25m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288823054723,"sku":"SSHF-752370-03","price":30.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m \/ 25m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823087491,"sku":"SSHF-752370-04","price":27.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m \/ 50m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288823120259,"sku":"SSHF-752370-05","price":68.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m \/ 50m \/ 31mm","offer_id":63288823153027,"sku":"SSHF-752370-06","price":93.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m \/ 50m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823185795,"sku":"SSHF-752370-07","price":51.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 10m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288823218563,"sku":"SSHF-752370-08","price":20.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 10m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823251331,"sku":"SSHF-752370-09","price":19.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 25m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288823284099,"sku":"SSHF-752370-10","price":50.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 25m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823316867,"sku":"SSHF-752370-11","price":33.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 50m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288823349635,"sku":"SSHF-752370-12","price":91.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 50m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823382403,"sku":"SSHF-752370-13","price":58.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 10m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288823415171,"sku":"SSHF-752370-14","price":27.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 10m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823447939,"sku":"SSHF-752370-15","price":23.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 25m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288823480707,"sku":"SSHF-752370-16","price":70.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 25m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823513475,"sku":"SSHF-752370-17","price":51.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 50m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288823546243,"sku":"SSHF-752370-18","price":143.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 50m \/ 31mm","offer_id":63288823579011,"sku":"SSHF-752370-19","price":156.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 50m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823611779,"sku":"SSHF-752370-20","price":93.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.35m \/ 50m \/ 31mm","offer_id":63288823644547,"sku":"SSHF-752370-21","price":171.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m \/ 25m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63288823677315,"sku":"SSHF-752370-22","price":142.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m \/ 50m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63288823710083,"sku":"SSHF-752370-23","price":156.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/galvanised-chicken-wire-roll-coop-86ff75fe-fe1c-42f2-b5d8-29aac2dfe8d6.jpg?v=1794571764"},{"product_id":"timber-bollards-100mm-green-treated-1-2m-2-4m","title":"Timber Bollards, 100mm Diameter, Machine Rounded, Green Treated, Chamfered Ends, 1.2m or 2.4m","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese timber bollards are machine-rounded posts in green pressure treated softwood, used to mark boundaries and keep vehicles off grass, verges and paths while still letting people walk through. Each bollard is 100mm in diameter with a flat, chamfered finish at both ends, and they are sold individually. Two lengths are available to buy: 1.2m and 2.4m. The timber is a spruce\/pine mix, described by the supplier as sustainably sourced. They suit councils, landowners, schools, car park operators and homeowners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSmooth, rounded timber with chamfered ends\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine rounding gives each post a consistent, smooth profile, and the chamfer at each end takes off the sharp edge for a neater finish. A row of bollards is often used where a solid fence is not needed, keeping the site open and natural-looking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated for outdoor use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGreen pressure treatment drives preservative into the timber to help it resist rot and decay outdoors. The green colour naturally fades over time to a silvery grey, which sits well in parks, forests and countryside sites.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA clear physical marker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet in a line, bollards let pedestrians pass between them but stop cars from parking on verges or driving onto paths and grassed areas. They give a visible edge to a car park, driveway or walkway without closing it off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: a deterrent, not a security bollard\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA 100mm timber bollard is a visual and low-speed deterrent. It marks a boundary and stops casual parking, but it is not an anti-ram or crash-rated security bollard and is not designed to stop a vehicle driven into it. The treatment information also differs between lengths: the supplier lists the 1.2m as UC4 treated with a stated lifespan of 15+ years, but the use class for the 2.4m is not published for this line. Cutting a bollard exposes untreated timber, which needs treating.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bollards are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVerge and grass protection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCar park and driveway edges\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWalkways and cycle paths\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlay areas and parks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eForest and countryside sites\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePedestrian-only areas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber bollard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood, spruce\/pine mix\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSourcing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSustainably sourced (as stated by the supplier)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen pressure treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine-rounded, chamfered at both ends\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLengths available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m; 2.4m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m: UC4; 2.4m: Not published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStated lifespan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m: 15+ years (supplier stated); 2.4m: Not published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximate weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m: 7kg; 2.4m: 14kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen, fading to silvery grey over time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndividual bollards\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eImpact or crash rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNone; not a security bollard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth lengths share the same 100mm diameter, treatment and chamfered finish, so the choice comes down to how tall you want the bollard to stand and how deep you plan to set it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1.2m\u003c\/strong\u003e suits low markers, such as along a lawn edge or path, with a shallower setting depth. It is also the length the supplier lists as UC4 treated, with a stated lifespan of 15+ years. It is the lighter and easier of the two to handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2.4m\u003c\/strong\u003e allows a deeper setting while still leaving a good height above ground, which makes it the more usual choice for car park edges and verges where a firmer post is wanted. It can also be cut down to make shorter bollards. The use class for this length is not published for this line, so bear that in mind if the setting depth or ground conditions matter to your job.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs general practice, bury a substantial part of the length. For the 2.4m bollard, around a third to a half of the length in the ground is common. Dig the hole, stand the bollard upright and set it in concrete or well-compacted hardcore, checking it is vertical as you go. Space the bollards to suit the site; to stop cars, keep them close enough that a vehicle cannot pass between. If you cut a bollard to length, treat the cut end with a suitable timber preservative before setting it. Check the bollards from time to time for movement or damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much of the bollard should go in the ground?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA substantial part of it. For the 2.4m bollard, around a third to a half of the length is commonly buried. The 1.2m suits low markers with a shallower setting. Set either length in concrete or compacted hardcore.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill these stop a vehicle driven at them?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. They are a visual and low-speed deterrent that marks a boundary and stops casual parking. They are not anti-ram or crash-rated security bollards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the 2.4m bollard UC4 treated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe use class for the 2.4m is not published for this line. The supplier lists the 1.2m as UC4 treated with a stated lifespan of 15+ years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the bollards to length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Cutting exposes untreated timber, so treat each cut end with a suitable timber preservative before installing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBollards are sold individually and priced per bollard as listed. A minimum order of 7 bollards applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"1.2m","offer_id":63289097486723,"sku":"SSHF-987970-01","price":21.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m","offer_id":63289097519491,"sku":"SSHF-987970-02","price":39.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/timber-bollards-car-park-verge-80fc14ae-cbcd-4c94-bfb1-cfcf83b35f61.jpg?v=1794573064"},{"product_id":"oak-gate-posts-rough-sawn-square-hardwood","title":"Oak Gate Posts, Rough Sawn Square Hardwood, 2.4m or 2.7m, 150mm to 200mm Square","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese oak gate posts are cut from 100% oak hardwood and supplied rough sawn in a square section. They are made for the hanging and shutting posts of field, farm, estate and driveway gates, where a post has to carry the weight of a gate and stand up to it being opened and closed. Four sizes are available to buy now: 2.4m × 150mm × 150mm, 2.4m × 200mm × 200mm, 2.7m × 175mm × 175mm and 2.7m × 200mm × 200mm. The 2.7m × 150mm × 150mm, 3.0m × 150mm × 150mm and 2.4m × 175mm × 175mm sizes are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA dense hardwood for gate posts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOak is a dense hardwood, and it is often chosen for hanging and shutting posts because a gate post takes more load than an ordinary fence post. The hanging post carries the full weight of the gate on its hinges, and the shutting post takes the knock of the gate closing against it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSquare section in a choice of sizes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach post is a solid square section. The range runs from 150mm × 150mm up to 200mm × 200mm, in lengths of 2.4m and 2.7m, so you can match the post to the width and weight of the gate and the height you need above ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRough sawn finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe posts are supplied rough sawn rather than planed, which suits farm, estate and rural settings. A sawn surface can be left as it is, or planed and shaped on site if you want a neater finish for an entrance feature.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: checking, tannins and weight\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSawn oak may check, meaning it develops surface splits as it dries and moves. Oak also contains tannins, which can stain surrounding surfaces and react with unprotected steel fixings, so use galvanised or stainless fixings throughout. Whether the oak is supplied green or seasoned, its durability class and any top finish are not published for this line. These posts are heavy: lifting and setting them needs two or more people or suitable lifting equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe posts are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHanging and shutting posts for field gates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFarm and estate gates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDriveway gates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeavy timber or metal gates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEntrance features\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGate post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100% oak hardwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRough sawn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfile\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare section\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.4m × 150mm × 150mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable; approx. 57kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.4m × 200mm × 200mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable; approx. 100kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.7m × 175mm × 175mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable; approx. 88kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.7m × 200mm × 200mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable; approx. 113kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.7m × 150mm × 150mm; 3.0m × 150mm × 150mm; 2.4m × 175mm × 175mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen or seasoned\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurability class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop finish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two choices to make: the length and the section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLength.\u003c\/strong\u003e As a general guide, about one third of a gate post's length goes in the ground. A 2.4m post set this way leaves roughly 1.6m above ground, and a 2.7m post roughly 1.8m. Choose the length that gives the height you need above ground once the buried depth is allowed for.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSection.\u003c\/strong\u003e Choose a larger section for wider or heavier gates. The 150mm × 150mm post is the lightest option. The 175mm × 175mm and 200mm × 200mm posts give more bulk for heavier timber or metal gates and wider openings. The hanging post usually takes the most load, so if in doubt, use the larger section there. Remember that weight rises steeply with section, from approx. 57kg to approx. 113kg across the range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 2.7m × 150mm × 150mm, 3.0m × 150mm × 150mm and 2.4m × 175mm × 175mm sizes are currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlan the lifting before delivery: two or more people or lifting equipment are needed to move and stand these posts. Dig the hole so that roughly one third of the post length will be buried. Set the post in concrete or well-compacted backfill, working in layers if backfilling. Set the hanging post plumb, check it on two adjacent faces, and brace it while the concrete sets or the backfill settles. Mark the hinge positions before final fixing and allow for the swing and clearance of the gate. Set the shutting post at the correct distance for the gate width and latch. Use galvanised or stainless fixings, hinges and latches to avoid tannin staining and corrosion. Check the posts, fixings and ground around them from time to time, especially after the first winter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much of the post should go in the ground?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs general practice, bury roughly one third of the post length for a gate post, and set it in concrete or well-compacted backfill.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the oak split?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSawn oak may check, which means fine surface splits can appear as the timber dries and moves. This is a normal characteristic of oak. Whether these posts are supplied green or seasoned is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat fixings should I use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse galvanised or stainless fixings. Oak tannins can react with unprotected steel, causing staining and corrosion around the fixing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the 3.0m post available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The 3.0m × 150mm × 150mm size is currently unavailable, as are the 2.7m × 150mm × 150mm and 2.4m × 175mm × 175mm sizes. You can order any of the four sizes listed as available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosts are sold individually and no minimum order applies. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout. These are very heavy items, so please make sure there is suitable access at the delivery address for unloading.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"2.4m \/ 150mm x 150mm","offer_id":63289102401923,"sku":"SSHF-905488-01","price":108.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 200mm x 200mm","offer_id":63289102434691,"sku":"SSHF-905488-02","price":222.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.7m \/ 175mm x 175mm","offer_id":63289102467459,"sku":"SSHF-905488-03","price":183.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.7m \/ 200mm x 200mm","offer_id":63289102500227,"sku":"SSHF-905488-04","price":262.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/oak-gate-posts-field-entrance-7ec58abe-4463-4036-8983-9a0367dc1f99.jpg?v=1794573102"},{"product_id":"post-and-rail-fencing-rails-3-6m-rectangular-half-round","title":"Post and Rail Fencing Rails, Green Treated, 3.6m, Rectangular or Half Round","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese green pressure treated softwood rails are made for post and rail fencing around paddocks, farm boundaries, gardens and driveways. Each rail is approximately 3.6m long, so it spans two bays on posts set at around 1.8m centres. Two profiles are available: a rough sawn rectangular rail with flat faces, in three sizes, and a half round rail with one flat face and one rounded face, in two sizes. All five are currently available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTwo profiles for different looks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rectangular rail is rough sawn from a pine and spruce mix, giving flat faces and square edges for a traditional, practical fence. The half round rail is machine rounded and then halved, so the flat face sits against the post and the rounded face shows outwards, giving a softer finish that suits gardens, parks and visitor areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLong lengths that span two bays\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt approximately 3.6m (3.66m for the half round), each rail is long enough to cross two bays on posts spaced at about 1.8m. Fewer joints means quicker fitting, and joints can be staggered from one rail line to the next so that the fence is not weakened at a single post.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated softwood\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rails are green pressure treated, which forces preservative into the timber rather than simply coating the surface. The half round rails are treated to Use Class 3 (UC3) according to the supplier. The treatment use class for the rectangular rails is Not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: rails are not posts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUC3 is an above-ground use class. That suits rails, which are fixed to posts and are not in contact with the ground, but these rails should not be cut down and used as posts or set into soil. Use posts treated for ground contact for that job. Cutting a rail to length exposes untreated timber at the end, so every cut end needs a brush-on end grain preservative.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rails are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePost and rail fencing for paddocks and equestrian use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFarm and field boundaries\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGarden boundaries and driveway edging\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVisitor attractions, where a simple open fence guides people\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eParks and other public open spaces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRectangular\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHalf Round\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood, pine and spruce mix\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood (species Not published for this line)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRough sawn, flat faces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine rounded and halved, one flat face and one rounded face\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen pressure treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen pressure treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUC3 (per supplier)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.6m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.66m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSizes available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e87mm × 38mm; 100mm × 38mm; 100mm × 47mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e85mm; 100mm (diameter of the round before halving)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximate weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5-10kg per rail, depending on size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 7kg per rail\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMoisture content\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with the profile. \u003cstrong\u003eRectangular\u003c\/strong\u003e rails give a flat, square-edged look and are a common choice for paddocks, stock fencing and working farm boundaries. \u003cstrong\u003eHalf Round\u003c\/strong\u003e rails show a rounded face and are often chosen for gardens, driveways, parks and visitor attractions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThen choose the size. In the rectangular profile, 87mm × 38mm is the lightest section, 100mm × 38mm gives a deeper face, and 100mm × 47mm is the thickest and heaviest of the three. In the half round profile, the size refers to the diameter of the round before halving, so the 100mm rail is the larger of the two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general guide, use 3 rails for horse and equestrian paddocks and 2-3 rails for general stock and gardens. Work out the number of rails by multiplying the number of rail lines by the fence length, then dividing by the rail length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet your posts first, using round or square posts treated for ground contact, at about 1.8m centres so that each 3.6m rail spans two bays. Fix the rails to the face of the posts with galvanised nails or screws. Stagger the joints between rail lines so they fall on different posts, and make sure each joint lands centrally on a post. Treat every cut end with end grain preservative before fixing. Check the fence from time to time, tighten or replace loose fixings, and re-treat cut or damaged areas as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use these rails as fence posts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The rails are made to be fixed above ground to posts. UC3 is an above-ground use class, so use posts treated for ground contact for anything set into soil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat spacing should my posts be?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor 3.6m rails, a post spacing of about 1.8m is typical. Each rail then spans two bays, with its ends meeting on a post.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need to treat cut ends?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Cutting exposes untreated timber inside the rail. Brush end grain preservative onto every cut end before fixing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the half round size mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 85mm and 100mm sizes describe the diameter of the round timber before it is halved. Each rail has one flat face for fixing to the post and one rounded face.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose your profile and size from the options. A minimum order of 10 rails applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout. Long lengths need suitable access for delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Rectangular \/ 3.6m x 87mm x 38mm","offer_id":63289105777027,"sku":"SSHF-808214-01","price":19.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Rectangular \/ 3.6m x 100mm x 38mm","offer_id":63289105809795,"sku":"SSHF-808214-02","price":22.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Rectangular \/ 3.6m x 100mm x 47mm","offer_id":63289105842563,"sku":"SSHF-808214-03","price":21.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Half Round \/ 3.66m x 85mm","offer_id":63289105875331,"sku":"SSHF-808214-04","price":16.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Half Round \/ 3.66m x 100mm","offer_id":63289105908099,"sku":"SSHF-808214-05","price":19.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/rectangular-timber-fence-rails-paddock-stack-6936604c-6a52-43fe-9fcf-29df3dfe4074.jpg?v=1794573144"},{"product_id":"green-pvc-coated-chicken-wire-hexagonal-mesh-rolls","title":"Green PVC Coated Chicken Wire, Hexagonal Mesh, 25mm or 50mm Holes, 0.6m to 1.2m High, 10m to 50m Rolls","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis green PVC coated chicken wire is a hexagonal wire netting made from galvanised steel wire with a green plastic coating, supplied on rolls. It comes in heights of 0.6m, 0.9m and 1.2m, roll lengths of 10m, 25m and 50m, and hole sizes of 25mm and 50mm, although not every combination is offered. The green finish sits more quietly among hedges, beds and planting than bright galvanised netting, which makes it a common choice for gardens, allotments and poultry runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGalvanised first, then PVC coated\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steel wire is galvanised before the green PVC coating is applied. The zinc layer underneath gives the wire a base level of rust protection, and the plastic coating adds a second layer over the top. The thickness of the PVC coating is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA green finish that blends in\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlain galvanised netting has a bright silver finish that can stand out in a garden. The green coating helps the mesh fade into lawns, hedging, vegetable beds and borders, so runs, cages and plant guards are less visible from a distance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFlexible hexagonal mesh\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe wires are twisted together to form six-sided holes rather than welded at each joint. This keeps the netting flexible enough to unroll by hand, wrap around posts and corners, shape over hoops and frames, and cut to length with wire cutters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: coating and predators\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a light netting. On its own it is not a fox-proof barrier, and a determined fox can bite through or push past it. Where foxes are a concern, use a heavier welded wire mesh for the run. The PVC coating can also be damaged by cutting, by abrasion against rough posts or stones, and by careless handling, which exposes the steel beneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe netting is typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eChicken and poultry runs and coops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGarden and allotment plant protection from birds and browsing animals\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFruit cages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePond covers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePet and small animal enclosures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTree and shrub guards\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGarden fencing where a green finish suits the planting better than galvanised wire\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHexagonal wire netting (twisted hex mesh) on rolls\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised steel wire\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen PVC coating applied over galvanising\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeights\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.6m, 0.9m, 1.2m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll lengths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10m, 25m, 50m (depending on height and hole size)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHole sizes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25mm, 50mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire gauge, 25mm hole\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22 gauge, as listed for this range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWire gauge, 50mm hole\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 gauge, as listed for this range\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGauge measured before or after coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVC coating thickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.6m × 25m 50mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManufacturing standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStart with the hole size, then pick the height and roll length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e25mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the closer mesh, using 22 gauge wire. It is the better choice for keeping out smaller birds and for young poultry. Available in 0.6m, 0.9m and 1.2m heights, each in 10m and 25m rolls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e50mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the more open mesh, using 20 gauge wire. It suits adult poultry runs, fruit cages and general plant protection. Available as 0.6m × 10m and 0.6m × 50m, and in 0.9m and 1.2m heights in 10m, 25m and 50m rolls. The 0.6m × 25m roll with 50mm holes is currently unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen choosing height, allow for any netting you intend to bury or turn outwards at ground level, and for how high the animals involved can jump or climb. 10m rolls suit small cages and repairs, while 25m and 50m rolls cover longer runs with fewer joins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnroll the netting along the fence line and fix it to timber or metal posts using staples, U-nails, cable ties or fencing clips. Pull the mesh taut and fix it at regular intervals, paying attention to the base so there are no gaps for animals to squeeze under. A straining wire at the top and bottom helps keep longer lengths tight. Cut with wire cutters while wearing gloves, and avoid dragging the roll over rough ground, which can scuff the coating. Cut ends expose bare steel, so check them and the fixings periodically for damage or rust, and replace any sections where the coating has worn through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs PVC coated chicken wire fox-proof?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It keeps poultry contained and deters smaller animals, but it is not designed to stop a determined fox. For predator protection, use a heavier welded wire mesh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy choose green coated wire over plain galvanised?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe main difference is appearance and the added coating layer. The green finish blends into planting more easily, and the wire is galvanised underneath the PVC.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes cutting the netting damage the coating?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting leaves the steel exposed at each cut end, and scraping or abrasion can also break the coating. Handle the roll with care and inspect cut edges from time to time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat gauge is the wire?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs listed for this range, rolls with 25mm holes use 22 gauge wire and rolls with 50mm holes use 20 gauge wire. Whether the gauge is measured before or after coating is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe netting is priced per roll as listed. A minimum order of 5 rolls applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"0.6m \/ 10m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63289120850307,"sku":"SSHF-922753-01","price":20.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m \/ 10m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63289120883075,"sku":"SSHF-922753-02","price":20.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m \/ 25m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63289120915843,"sku":"SSHF-922753-03","price":35.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.6m \/ 50m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63289120948611,"sku":"SSHF-922753-04","price":52.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 10m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63289120981379,"sku":"SSHF-922753-05","price":27.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 10m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63289121014147,"sku":"SSHF-922753-06","price":20.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 25m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63289121046915,"sku":"SSHF-922753-07","price":56.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 25m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63289121079683,"sku":"SSHF-922753-08","price":48.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"0.9m \/ 50m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63289121112451,"sku":"SSHF-922753-09","price":72.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 10m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63289121145219,"sku":"SSHF-922753-10","price":29.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 10m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63289121177987,"sku":"SSHF-922753-11","price":25.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 25m \/ 25mm","offer_id":63289121210755,"sku":"SSHF-922753-12","price":74.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 25m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63289121243523,"sku":"SSHF-922753-13","price":58.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.2m \/ 50m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63289121276291,"sku":"SSHF-922753-14","price":96.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/pvc-coated-chicken-wire-roll-vegetable-garden-d2eb85c9-a7d8-4477-9ab2-17e0a07f519c.jpg?v=1794573204"},{"product_id":"uc4-treated-square-gate-posts-pyramid-top-flat-end","title":"UC4 Treated Square Gate Posts, Pyramid Top or Flat End, 2.4m or 3.0m, 150mm to 200mm Square","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese square softwood gate posts are green pressure treated to Use Class 4 (UC4), the treatment class intended for timber in contact with the ground. They are made to serve as the hanging and shutting posts of a gate, carrying its weight and taking the strain of it being opened and closed. Available now are the Pyramid Top at 2.4m in 150mm, 175mm and 200mm square sections, and the Flat End at 3.0m × 150mm × 150mm. Five Flat End options are currently unavailable, as listed in the specifications below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eUC4 treatment for ground contact\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse Class 4 is the class for timber that is set in the ground or in permanent contact with soil, which is exactly where the bottom third of a gate post sits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA choice of top\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe pyramid top is cut to a point on four faces, so rain runs off rather than sitting on the end grain, and it gives the post a finished look. The flat end is left square, which means it can be cut down to the exact height you need on site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSections to suit the gate\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach post is a solid square section, from 150mm × 150mm up to 200mm × 200mm. A bigger section gives more bulk for wider or heavier gates, while the smaller section suits lighter garden and pedestrian gates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe timber species, whether the posts are kiln dried, and the weight of each size are not published for this line. Any cut made on site exposes untreated timber inside the post, so cut ends need treating. Softwood posts of these sections are heavy, so plan for two people to lift and set each one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese posts are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eField and farm gates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDriveway gates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGarden gates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePedestrian gates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEntrance posts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGate post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen pressure treated, UC4 (ground contact)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfile\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare section\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop options\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePyramid Top or Flat End\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePyramid Top 2.4m × 150mm × 150mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePyramid Top 2.4m × 175mm × 175mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePyramid Top 2.4m × 200mm × 200mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat End 3.0m × 150mm × 150mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat End 2.4m × 150mm × 150mm; Flat End 3.0m × 175mm × 175mm; Flat End 3.0m × 200mm × 200mm; Flat End 2.7m × 150mm × 150mm; Flat End 2.4m × 175mm × 175mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber species\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKiln dried\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are three choices: the top, the length and the section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTop.\u003c\/strong\u003e Pick the pyramid top if you want a neat finished post that sheds water from its end grain and you are happy with the height it gives. Pick the flat end if you need to trim the post to a particular height on site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLength.\u003c\/strong\u003e As a guide, bury about one third of a gate post's length. A 2.4m post set this way stands roughly 1.6m above ground, and a 3.0m post roughly 2.0m. Choose the length that gives the height you need once the buried depth is allowed for.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSection.\u003c\/strong\u003e The 150mm × 150mm post suits lighter gates such as garden and pedestrian gates. The 175mm × 175mm and 200mm × 200mm posts are better for wider or heavier gates, such as field, farm and driveway gates. The hanging post carries the gate on its hinges, so if you are unsure, use the larger section for that side.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt present, the 3.0m length is available only as a Flat End 150mm × 150mm post, and the 175mm and 200mm sections are available only with a pyramid top at 2.4m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eArrange two people for lifting before the posts arrive. Dig each hole so that about one third of the post will be buried, then set the post in concrete or in backfill compacted in layers. Stand the hanging post plumb, checking two adjacent faces, and brace it until the concrete has set or the backfill has firmed up. Mark the hinge positions with the gate swing and ground clearance in mind, and set the shutting post at the right distance for the gate width and latch. If you cut a flat end post to height, treat the cut end with a suitable end grain preservative before fitting. Use galvanised hinges, latches and fixings. Check the posts and fittings from time to time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does UC4 mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUC4 stands for Use Class 4, the treatment class for timber used in contact with the ground, such as a post set into soil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the post to length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The flat end posts are suited to cutting to height on site. Cutting exposes untreated timber, so treat every cut surface before the post goes up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich section do I need for a heavy gate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the 175mm × 175mm or 200mm × 200mm section for wider or heavier gates. The 150mm × 150mm section is better suited to lighter garden and pedestrian gates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow heavy are the posts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeights are not published for this line. The posts are heavy, so two people should handle each one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA minimum order of 2 posts applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout. Please make sure there is suitable access at the delivery address for unloading.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Pyramid Top \/ 2.4m \/ 150mm x 150mm","offer_id":63293206200707,"sku":"SSHF-479724-01","price":104.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pyramid Top \/ 2.4m \/ 175mm x 175mm","offer_id":63293206233475,"sku":"SSHF-479724-02","price":185.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pyramid Top \/ 2.4m \/ 200mm x 200mm","offer_id":63293206266243,"sku":"SSHF-479724-03","price":218.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Flat End \/ 3.0m \/ 150mm x 150mm","offer_id":63293206299011,"sku":"SSHF-479724-04","price":114.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/square-treated-gate-post-pyramid-top-set-field-entrance-eac5307c-000f-4da4-89b8-93718978a5bb.jpg?v=1794595584"},{"product_id":"rustic-oak-square-fence-posts-hardwood","title":"Rustic Oak Square Fence Posts, Hardwood, 1.8m to 3.0m, 75mm or 100mm Square","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese rustic oak square fence posts are solid oak hardwood posts with a square section, sold individually. They suit garden, estate and countryside fencing where a natural timber look is wanted, as well as landscaping and decorative work. Two sections are offered: 75mm × 75mm in 1.8m and 2.4m lengths, and 100mm × 100mm in 1.8m, 2.4m and 3.0m lengths. All five sizes are currently available. They suit gardeners, landowners, landscapers and fencing contractors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOak hardwood with a rustic look\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOak is a dense hardwood. These posts have a square section and a rustic character, which suits informal garden fencing, countryside boundaries and features where the timber is meant to be seen rather than hidden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNaturally durable without pressure treatment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general rule, oak is a naturally durable hardwood and is not normally pressure treated. Its resistance to decay comes from the timber itself rather than from an applied preservative. The durability class for this line is not published, and neither is whether the posts are supplied green or seasoned.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWeathers to silver grey\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLeft outdoors without a coating, oak generally weathers from its fresh colour to a silver grey over time. Many people choose oak for this reason, as weathered posts sit comfortably alongside gardens, hedgerows and field boundaries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: checking and fixings\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOak commonly checks, meaning small surface splits open along the grain as the timber dries and moves. This is a normal characteristic of oak. Oak also contains tannins, which can stain and corrode unprotected steel and can leave dark marks around fixings. Use galvanised or stainless steel fixings throughout. The finish, weight and whether the posts are pointed are not published for this line, so check the posts on arrival if your installation method depends on any of these.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePossible uses include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRustic garden fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePost and rail fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEstate and countryside fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePergola and arbour posts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLandscaping features, such as raised bed corners\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSignposts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare fence post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOak hardwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSections available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75mm × 75mm; 100mm × 100mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLengths in 75mm × 75mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8m; 2.4m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLengths in 100mm × 100mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8m; 2.4m; 3.0m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailability\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll five sizes currently available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndividual posts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line (oak is not normally pressure treated)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen or seasoned\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePointed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePost weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurability class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two choices to make: the section and the length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e75mm × 75mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the lighter section. In general practice it is used for garden fencing, post and wire fencing, rustic and decorative fencing, and raised bed corners. It is available in 1.8m and 2.4m lengths.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e100mm × 100mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the heavier section. It is generally the better choice for post and rail fencing, heavier fences and features such as pergolas and arbours. It is available in 1.8m, 2.4m and 3.0m lengths.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo choose a length, work back from the height you need above ground. A common rule is to bury about a third of the post. On that basis, a 1.8m post leaves about 1.2m above ground, a 2.4m post about 1.6m and a 3.0m post about 2.0m. Ground conditions, exposure and the load on the fence may call for more depth, so allow for your own site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMark out the fence line and post positions first. Set each post with about a third of its length in the ground, either in concrete or in compacted hardcore. Where the ground is suitable, posts can be driven instead; as whether the posts are pointed is not published for this line, check them on arrival before planning to drive. Keep each post plumb while it is being set, and check the line before any concrete hardens.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse galvanised or stainless steel nails, screws, staples and brackets, as oak tannins can stain and corrode unprotected steel. Expect some surface checking as the timber dries; this is normal for oak. Inspect the posts and fixings from time to time, and replace any fixing that shows signs of corrosion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre these posts pressure treated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTreatment is not published for this line. As a general point, oak is a naturally durable hardwood and is not normally pressure treated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat fixings should I use with oak?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse galvanised or stainless steel fixings. Oak contains tannins that can stain and corrode unprotected steel, which can mark the timber and weaken the fixing over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much of the post should go in the ground?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA common rule is about a third of the length. For example, a 1.8m post set this way leaves about 1.2m above ground. Set it in concrete or compacted hardcore, or drive it where the ground is suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWill the posts split or change colour?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOak may check, meaning small surface splits form as the timber dries. This is normal for oak. Left uncoated outdoors, oak generally weathers to a silver grey over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosts are sold individually and priced per post as listed. Choose your section and length from the options before adding to basket. A minimum order of 5 posts applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"1.8m \/ 75mm x 75mm","offer_id":63293212524931,"sku":"SSHF-387909-01","price":22.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"1.8m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63293212557699,"sku":"SSHF-387909-02","price":40.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 75mm x 75mm","offer_id":63293212590467,"sku":"SSHF-387909-03","price":31.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.4m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63293212623235,"sku":"SSHF-387909-04","price":54.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.0m \/ 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63293212656003,"sku":"SSHF-387909-05","price":69.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/oak-square-fence-post-lying-on-lawn-ce503e03-3cc0-4d8a-9e13-831adbe7e50c.jpg?v=1794595637"},{"product_id":"4-way-pointed-rectangular-fence-posts-uc4-treated","title":"4-Way Pointed Rectangular Fence Posts, UC4 Treated Kiln Dried, 75 x 125mm or 75 x 150mm, 1.8m or 2.1m","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese rectangular softwood fence posts are made for fencing jobs where the post goes straight into the ground. Each post is kiln dried, pressure treated to Use Class 4 (UC4) for ground contact, and pointed on four faces at the bottom end so it can be driven with a post driver or a hand rammer. Two sections are available, 75mm × 125mm and 75mm × 150mm, each in 1.8m and 2.1m lengths, and all four options are currently available. Posts are sold individually. They suit farmers, smallholders, equestrian yards, landowners and fencing contractors putting up post and rail or stock fencing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eTreated for ground contact\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse Class 4 is the treatment category for timber that is in contact with the ground. That is the class normally chosen for fence posts, which spend their working life with one end buried in soil. The preservative is applied under pressure rather than brushed on, so it is forced into the timber instead of sitting on the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKiln dried before treatment\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs general practice, timber is dried before pressure treatment because drier wood takes up preservative more readily than wet wood. Kiln drying the posts first helps the preservative penetrate further into the timber during treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA 4-way point for straighter driving\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe bottom end of each post is pointed on all four faces. Because the point is formed evenly from every side, the post is less likely to wander off line as it is driven, which helps you keep it straight and upright whether you use a tractor-mounted post driver or a hand rammer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: cut ends, species and finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting a post, whether shortening it or trimming the top, exposes timber that may not have been fully reached by the preservative. Treat every cut end with a suitable end-grain preservative before the post goes in. The timber species, the finish (planed or sawn) and the weight per post are not published for this line. In very stony or hard ground, driving can be difficult and may damage the point; making a pilot hole first is common practice in those conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe posts are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePost and rail fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStock fencing and equestrian fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDriven fence posts installed with a post driver\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGate-adjacent posts for light gates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGeneral agricultural fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRectangular fence post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrying\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKiln dried\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePressure treated, UC4 (Use Class 4, ground contact)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePoint\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4-way pointed (pointed on four faces at the bottom end)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSections available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75mm × 125mm; 75mm × 150mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLengths available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8m; 2.1m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent availability\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll four section and length options\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndividual posts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber species\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish (planed or sawn)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight per post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two choices to make: section and length.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLength.\u003c\/strong\u003e As a general guide, a 1.8m post suits a fence of around 1.0m to 1.2m high when it is driven about 0.6m into the ground. Choose 2.1m posts for taller fences.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSection.\u003c\/strong\u003e The 75mm × 125mm section is a common choice for general post and rail and stock fencing. The 75mm × 150mm section gives a wider face and more timber, and is generally the better choice for heavier rails and equestrian fencing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhichever section you choose, it is general practice to set the post so the wider face runs along the fence line, giving the rails the full width to fix to.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet out the fence line with a string line and mark each post position. Drive each post point first with a post driver or hand rammer, checking it is upright with a spirit level as you go, and turn it so the wider face runs along the fence line. Drive to the depth that suits your fence height, such as about 0.6m for a 1.8m post on a fence of around 1.0m to 1.2m. If you need to cut a post to length, treat the cut end with an end-grain preservative before fixing rails or boards. Use corrosion-resistant fixings for rails and boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does UC4 mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUC4 stands for Use Class 4, the treatment category for timber used in contact with the ground. It is the class normally chosen for fence posts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I drive these posts instead of digging holes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Each post is pointed on four faces at the bottom end so it can be driven with a post driver or a hand rammer. In very hard or stony ground, a pilot hole may be needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the posts to length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but treat every cut end with a suitable end-grain preservative, because cutting exposes timber that may not have been fully reached by the treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat timber species are the posts?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe posts are softwood. The exact timber species is not published for this line, and neither is the finish (planed or sawn).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosts are sold individually. A minimum order of 6 posts applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"75mm x 125mm \/ 1.8m","offer_id":63293215179139,"sku":"SSHF-212442-01","price":32.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"75mm x 125mm \/ 2.1m","offer_id":63293215211907,"sku":"SSHF-212442-02","price":37.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"75mm x 150mm \/ 1.8m","offer_id":63293215244675,"sku":"SSHF-212442-03","price":36.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"75mm x 150mm \/ 2.1m","offer_id":63293215277443,"sku":"SSHF-212442-04","price":47.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/pointed-rectangular-fence-posts-paddock-edge-b29c452d-33ed-4d6d-a20e-9e0442ca0a2e.jpg?v=1794595678"},{"product_id":"machine-rounded-fence-posts-green-uc4-treated","title":"Machine Rounded Fence Posts, Chamfered Top, Green Treated or UC4 Treated, 1.2m to 2.4m, 40mm to 100mm Diameter","description":"\u003cp\u003eThese machine-round timber fence posts are softwood posts turned to a consistent diameter along their length, with a chamfered top. They are sold individually and come in two treatments: Green Treated, in lengths from 1.2m to 2.4m and diameters from 40mm to 100mm, and UC4 Treated, in 1.8m lengths at 75mm and 100mm. They suit farmers, smallholders, landscapers, gardeners and anyone putting up stock, wire, rail or garden fencing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA consistent round profile\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine rounding takes each post down to an even diameter, so posts of the same size match one another. That makes it easier to keep a fence line straight, to fix wire, netting or rails at a steady height and to plan quantities from a single size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA chamfered top\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach post has a chamfered top. Whether the bottom of the post is pointed is not published for this line, so check the posts on arrival before you plan to drive them, and point them yourself if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA wide choice of sizes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Green Treated range runs from slim 40mm posts for staking and light netting up to 100mm posts for post and rail and heavier fences. Lengths run from 1.2m to 2.4m, so one listing covers short garden jobs through to taller stock and rail fencing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits: treatment class and cut ends\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUC4 (Use Class 4) is the treatment class intended for timber in contact with the ground. The Green Treated posts are pressure treated, but their use class is not published for this line. For permanent fence posts set in the ground, choose UC4 Treated where it is available in the size you need. Cutting or pointing a post exposes untreated timber, so treat all cut ends with a suitable preservative before fitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe posts are typically used for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStock fencing and post and wire fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePost and rail fencing, using 100mm posts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGarden and rabbit fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTree staking and plant supports\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupports for netting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGeneral landscaping work\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine-round timber fence post\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfile\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine rounded to a consistent diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChamfered\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBottom (pointed or flat)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndividual posts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen Treated: 1.2m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40mm, 50mm, 60mm diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen Treated: 1.5m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40mm, 50mm, 60mm diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen Treated: 1.65m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50mm, 60mm, 75mm diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen Treated: 1.8m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50mm, 60mm, 75mm, 100mm diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen Treated: 2.1m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50mm diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen Treated: 2.4m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50mm, 60mm, 75mm, 100mm diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen Treated use class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUC4 Treated: 1.8m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75mm, 100mm diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrently unavailable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUC4 Treated 2.4m × 75mm, 2.4m × 100mm, 2.4m × 200mm and 3.0m × 85mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber species\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePost weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the treatment first, then the length and diameter. The guidance below is general practice; your own site, soil and fence design may call for something different.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTreatment.\u003c\/strong\u003e For posts that will stand permanently in the ground, UC4 Treated is the class intended for ground contact and is the better choice where the size you need is offered: 1.8m at 75mm or 100mm. The UC4 options at 2.4m (75mm, 100mm and 200mm) and 3.0m × 85mm are currently unavailable. Green Treated suits the wider range of sizes, with its use class not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDiameter.\u003c\/strong\u003e 40mm to 50mm posts suit tree stakes, plant supports, netting and rabbit or garden fencing. 60mm to 75mm posts are typical for intermediate posts in stock fencing and post and wire fencing. 100mm posts suit post and rail and heavier fences. Gate posts and strainer posts carry more load, so for those positions use bigger, purpose-sized strainer posts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLength.\u003c\/strong\u003e Allow for roughly a third to a half of the post to be in the ground, so pick a length that leaves the fence height you need above ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet out the fence line and mark post positions. For wire fences, space posts at around 2m to 3m. Shorter posts are usually driven in with a post driver; longer posts are usually set in a dug hole and backfilled firmly. Bury roughly a third to a half of each post's length. Treat any cut or pointed ends with a suitable preservative before fitting. Check posts from time to time for movement or damage and re-firm them where needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between Green Treated and UC4 Treated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth are treated timber. UC4 is the use class intended for timber in ground contact. The Green Treated posts are pressure treated, but their use class is not published for this line, so for permanent in-ground posts prefer UC4 where available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo the posts have a pointed end?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe posts have a chamfered top. Whether the bottom is pointed is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow deep should the posts go in the ground?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs general practice, bury roughly a third to a half of the post's length. Shorter posts are usually driven and longer posts set in a hole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the 2.4m × 75mm post available in UC4?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The UC4 Treated options at 2.4m (75mm, 100mm and 200mm) are currently unavailable. The 2.4m × 75mm post is available in Green Treated, and UC4 Treated is available at 1.8m in 75mm and 100mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePosts are priced individually as listed. A minimum order of 20 posts applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.2m \/ 40mm","offer_id":63293227172227,"sku":"SSHF-112181-01","price":5.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.2m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63293227204995,"sku":"SSHF-112181-02","price":6.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.2m \/ 60mm","offer_id":63293227237763,"sku":"SSHF-112181-03","price":7.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.5m \/ 40mm","offer_id":63293227270531,"sku":"SSHF-112181-04","price":6.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.5m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63293227303299,"sku":"SSHF-112181-05","price":6.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.5m \/ 60mm","offer_id":63293227336067,"sku":"SSHF-112181-06","price":9.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.65m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63293227368835,"sku":"SSHF-112181-07","price":8.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.65m \/ 60mm","offer_id":63293227401603,"sku":"SSHF-112181-08","price":10.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.65m \/ 75mm","offer_id":63293227434371,"sku":"SSHF-112181-09","price":11.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.8m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63293227467139,"sku":"SSHF-112181-10","price":8.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.8m \/ 60mm","offer_id":63293227499907,"sku":"SSHF-112181-11","price":10.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.8m \/ 75mm","offer_id":63293227532675,"sku":"SSHF-112181-12","price":14.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 1.8m \/ 100mm","offer_id":63293227565443,"sku":"SSHF-112181-13","price":24.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 2.1m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63293227598211,"sku":"SSHF-112181-14","price":9.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 2.4m \/ 50mm","offer_id":63293227630979,"sku":"SSHF-112181-15","price":11.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 2.4m \/ 60mm","offer_id":63293227663747,"sku":"SSHF-112181-16","price":15.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 2.4m \/ 75mm","offer_id":63293227696515,"sku":"SSHF-112181-17","price":20.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green Treated \/ 2.4m \/ 100mm","offer_id":63293227729283,"sku":"SSHF-112181-18","price":32.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"UC4 Treated \/ 1.8m \/ 75mm","offer_id":63293227762051,"sku":"SSHF-112181-19","price":15.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"UC4 Treated \/ 1.8m \/ 100mm","offer_id":63293227794819,"sku":"SSHF-112181-20","price":30.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/round-pointed-fence-posts-bundle-field-edge-dacbec6a-b149-4d66-ae0a-101dfd445c95.jpg?v=1794595787"},{"product_id":"fence-panel-backing-rails-1-83m-32x75mm-green-brown","title":"Fence Panel Backing Rails, 1.83m x 32mm x 75mm, Rough Sawn Softwood, Green or Brown Pressure Treated","description":"\u003cp\u003eBacking rails are the slim horizontal timbers that feather edge boards are nailed to when you build a closeboard fence or make up your own closeboard panels. These rails are 1.83m long, 75mm wide and 32mm thick. They are cut from rough sawn softwood and pressure treated in either green or brown, so you can match the boards and posts already on your job. They are sold individually. Fencing contractors, landscapers, builders and homeowners use them to make panels on site, to repair a panel whose rails have failed, and to add an extra rail to a tall fence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eThe right section for nailing boards\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt 75mm wide, the rail gives a feather edge board a broad face to nail into. That makes it easier to keep nails away from the edge of the rail and to set each board straight. At 32mm thick, there is enough timber to hold a nail without the rail splitting, while staying light enough to handle and fix on your own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated against rot and insects\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth colours are pressure treated to help the timber resist rot and insect attack outdoors. Green treated timber starts with a green tint that weathers over time. Brown treated timber starts a mid brown that suits brown boards and posts. The use class for this line is not published, so keep the rails off the ground and use a gravel board below the boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA standard 6ft panel length\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 1.83m length matches the common 6ft panel width, so a rail spans one bay between posts without joints. A typical closeboard panel uses two or three rails, depending on its height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRough sawn finish\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe surface is left rough sawn rather than planed. This is normal for fencing timber and gives a good grip for stain if you choose to colour the fence later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMaking up closeboard and feather edge panels on site\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRepairing panels with split or rotten rails\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdding a middle rail to tall boarded fences\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFraming bin stores, log stores and screens\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGeneral garden and outbuilding joinery outdoors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence panel backing rail\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.83m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRough sawn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen pressure treated or brown pressure treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle rails\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth treatments share the same size, timber and rough sawn finish, so the choice is about colour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGreen Treated\u003c\/strong\u003e suits fences built from green treated feather edge boards, posts and gravel boards. The green tint fades with weathering, so new rails on an older green fence will blend in over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrown Treated\u003c\/strong\u003e suits brown treated boards and posts and gives a finished brown look from day one. Choose it when you want the rails to match brown panels straight away, or when the fence will be stained a dark colour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a guide, plan two rails per bay for fences up to about 1.2m high, and three rails per bay for taller fences, so the boards stay flat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFix the rails between posts, or to the back of the boards when making panels flat on the ground, keeping them level and square. Nail each feather edge board to every rail, overlapping the boards evenly. Use galvanised or stainless nails to avoid rust marks. Treat any cut ends with a suitable end-grain preservative, as cutting exposes untreated timber. Keep the bottom of the fence off the soil with a gravel board, and check fixings each year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many rails do I need per panel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo rails are usual for low panels and three for panels around 1.8m high. Add a rail if boards are long enough to bow between rails.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut the rails to a shorter length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. They cut easily with a hand saw. Treat each cut end with an end-grain preservative before fixing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre these rails planed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. They are rough sawn, which is the normal finish for fencing timber and takes stain well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan these rails go in the ground?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe use class is not published for this line, so we do not recommend ground contact. Use posts and gravel boards for parts that touch the soil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRails are sold individually and priced per rail. A minimum order of 39 rails applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green Treated","offer_id":63294346985859,"sku":"SSHF-855650-01","price":5.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown Treated","offer_id":63294347018627,"sku":"SSHF-855650-02","price":5.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-treated-fence-backing-rails-patio-479d46e3-7efa-4eb8-974b-b5c9062168da.jpg?v=1794608034"},{"product_id":"flat-fence-capping-1-83m-44x16mm-green-brown","title":"Flat Fence Capping, 1.83m x 44mm x 16mm, Pressure Treated Softwood, Green or Brown","description":"\u003cp\u003eFence capping is the strip of timber that runs along the top of a closeboard fence, covering the exposed end grain of the feather edge boards. This capping is 1.83m long, 44mm wide and 16mm thick, cut from softwood and pressure treated in either green or brown. It is sold in single lengths. The supplier describes it as a flat capping. It finishes the top of the fence and adds a little stiffness along the top edge. Its main job is to stop water sitting on top of the feather edge boards, where rot usually starts. Fencing contractors, landscapers and homeowners fit it to new fences and add it to older fences that were built without one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKeeps water off the board tops\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe top end of a feather edge board is end grain, which soaks up water quickly. A capping strip covers that end grain so rain runs off instead of soaking down into the boards. This helps the tops of the boards last longer and look neater.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAdds stability along the top\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNailed along the top of the fence, the capping ties the board ends together. That helps stop individual boards twisting or standing proud, and gives the fence a straight top line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated in two colours\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth colours are pressure treated for outdoor use. Green treated capping weathers over time. Brown treated capping starts a mid brown that suits brown boards. The use class is not published for this line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the size\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt 44mm wide, the capping suits standard feather edge closeboard fences. Check the combined thickness of your boards and any counter rail before you order, so the capping covers what you need it to.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTopping new closeboard and feather edge fences\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRefurbishing older fences with weathered board tops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFinishing the top edge of timber screens\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBin and log store tops built from feather edge boards\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat fence capping\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.83m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWidth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThickness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTimber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoftwood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen pressure treated or brown pressure treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUse class\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle lengths\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth options share the same size, so the choice is about colour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGreen Treated\u003c\/strong\u003e suits green treated fences. New green capping on an older fence will weather towards the same tone over time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrown Treated\u003c\/strong\u003e suits brown boards and posts and gives a finished look straight away. Choose it for brown panels, or if you plan to stain the fence a darker colour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo work out how many lengths you need, divide the total fence run in metres by 1.83 and round up. Each 1.83m length covers one standard 6ft bay. Add one or two spare lengths to allow for cuts at corners and posts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTrim the board tops level first. Lay the capping along the top of the boards, centred over them, and nail down into the boards at regular intervals with galvanised or stainless nails. Pre-drill near the ends to avoid splitting the thin strip. Butt joints should land over a post or a board, not in mid-air. Treat any cut ends with an end-grain preservative. A coat of fence stain every few years will keep the capping and boards protected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need fence capping?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is not essential, but it protects the end grain at the top of feather edge boards from water. That is where boards most often start to rot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many lengths do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDivide the fence length in metres by 1.83 and round up. Add a spare length or two for cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I cut it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Cut with a fine saw and treat the cut end with a preservative.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat nails should I use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse galvanised or stainless steel nails so they do not rust and stain the timber. Pre-drill near the ends.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCapping is sold in single 1.83m lengths and priced per length. A minimum order of 36 lengths applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"Green Treated","offer_id":63294347608451,"sku":"SSHF-807426-01","price":5.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown Treated","offer_id":63294347641219,"sku":"SSHF-807426-02","price":5.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/green-treated-fence-capping-gravel-path-0e4b95f7-599b-4559-8b8b-acb010773cab.jpg?v=1794608065"},{"product_id":"bent-knee-rail-brackets-galvanised-75-100x500mm","title":"Bent Knee Rail Brackets, Galvanised Steel Strap, 75 x 500mm or 100 x 500mm","description":"\u003cp\u003eKnee rail brackets are the galvanised steel straps used to fix the top rail of a knee rail fence to its upright posts. Knee rail fencing is the low post-and-rail barrier seen along village greens, verges, school grounds and park paths. Its posts are usually cut with a birdsmouth, a V-shaped notch, that the rail sits in. Each bracket here is a single flat steel strap bent once at a right angle. One leg wraps over the rail and the other runs down the face of the post, and both are nailed in place. The listed sizes are 75 x 500mm and 100 x 500mm. Brackets are sold individually. Grounds maintenance teams, councils and fencing contractors use them on new knee rail fences and to repair existing ones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA simple, strong strap fixing\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA bent strap holds the rail down into the post from above and from the side, so the rail cannot lift out of its notch. There are no moving parts and nothing to loosen. Once nailed, the bracket stays put.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGalvanised for outdoor use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe brackets are galvanised to help them resist rust in all weathers. That matters on a fence that stands on open ground and is often wet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNailed, not bolted\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier states the brackets are fixed with 50mm nails. Fitting only needs a hammer, so it is quick to work along a long run of fence. Nails are not listed as included, so order them separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the sizing\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier lists the sizes as 75 x 500mm and 100 x 500mm, and the item names describe both as suitable for 100mm posts. The exact meaning of each dimension is not published for this line, so measure your rail and post before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eKnee rail fences on village greens and verges\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePark, school and playing field boundaries\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCar park and driveway edges with timber rails\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReplacing rusted or missing brackets on existing fences\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBent knee rail support bracket\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eForm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat steel strap, bent once\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSizes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 x 500mm; 100 x 500mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePost suitability (supplier stated)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100mm posts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50mm nails (not listed as included)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel gauge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle brackets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBoth sizes are the same price, finish and form. The choice comes down to your rail and post.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e100 x 500mm\u003c\/strong\u003e suits fences built with 100mm timber, which is the most common section for knee rail fencing on public open spaces. Choose this size when your posts and rails are 100mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e75 x 500mm\u003c\/strong\u003e is the narrower strap for lighter fences built with smaller timber. As the supplier's item names describe both sizes as suitable for 100mm posts, check the width of the rail the strap needs to cover before choosing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou need one bracket per post where the top rail passes over it. Count the posts along the run, including end posts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSit the rail in the post notch first. Place the bracket so the bend sits on the top edge of the rail, with one leg on the top of the rail and the other down the post face. Nail through both legs with 50mm galvanised nails. Keep the strap tight to the timber as you nail so the rail cannot move. Check the brackets each year, especially after mowing work or vehicle knocks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre nails included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNails are not listed as included. The supplier states the brackets are fixed with 50mm nails; use galvanised nails to match the bracket.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many brackets do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOne per post where the rail crosses it. Count every post along the run.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich size fits my fence?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier describes both as suitable for 100mm posts. Choose 100 x 500mm for 100mm rails and measure before choosing 75 x 500mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill they rust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThey are galvanised for outdoor use, which helps them resist rust. Damaged coating should be touched up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBrackets are sold individually and priced per bracket. A minimum order of 51 brackets applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"75 x 500mm","offer_id":63294348394883,"sku":"SSHF-340323-01","price":4.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"100 x 500mm","offer_id":63294348427651,"sku":"SSHF-340323-02","price":4.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/galvanised-bent-knee-rail-brackets-table-1c5ec568-ae37-487a-a3a0-d07f4e6117f3.jpg?v=1794608101"},{"product_id":"cundy-peeled-half-round-fence-rails-3-6m","title":"Cundy Peeled Half Round Fence Rails, 3.6m x 100-125mm, Green Pressure Treated","description":"\u003cp\u003eCundy peeled half rails are the rustic option for post and rail fencing. Each rail is a pole split along its length, so it has one flat face and one rounded face. The bark is scraped off rather than the pole being machine rounded, so the rails keep a natural, slightly irregular shape. They are 3.6m long, with a diameter that varies along the length, generally between 100mm and 125mm. They are green pressure treated and sold individually. Farmers, smallholders, equestrian yards, estates and landscapers use them for paddocks, field boundaries, woodland edges and gardens where a softer, countryside look is wanted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eA natural look\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause they are peeled rather than turned, these rails are not perfectly round or uniform. The supplier describes them as giving a rustic, more natural appearance and as a popular alternative to machine rounded timber. That suits countryside settings, gardens and visitor sites where a uniform machine-made rail would look out of place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFlat back for fixing\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe flat face of a half rail sits tight against a post, so it is easy to nail and does not roll while you fix it. The rounded face faces outwards and has no sharp corners for livestock to rub against.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePressure treated\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rails are tanalised, a vacuum pressure treatment that drives preservative deep into the timber against fungal decay, insects and rot. The supplier states the treated timber is protected against rotting for up to 8 years. The colour starts green, fades to a honey brown and finally to a silver grey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe diameter varies from rail to rail and along each rail, so expect some variation and choose posts with that in mind. The supplier's technical panel also lists a 2.1m length, which conflicts with the 3.6m stated in the product title, features and description. The rails are listed as 3.6m.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePaddock and field post and rail fencing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEquestrian yards and arenas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWoodland edges and estate boundaries\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGardens and visitor sites wanting a rustic finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCombined with wire stock fencing for small livestock\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCundy peeled half round rail\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.6m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100-125mm (varies along the rail)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfile\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHalf round: one flat face, one rounded face\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBark peeled, not machine rounded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTreatment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen tanalised (vacuum pressure treated)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStated protection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 8 years against rotting (supplier stated)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen, weathering to honey brown then silver grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle rails\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis rail comes in one size, so the decisions are about layout. Plan posts so that rail joints land on a post. The supplier's guidance is to nail the rails to round or square timber posts at intervals that suit the 3.6m length. At least three horizontal rails are normal, depending on fence height and the animals being kept.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor horses and cattle, three rails give a clear, visible barrier. For sheep, pigs or smaller animals, add galvanised stock fencing or welded mesh to the rails and posts. Choose posts of a similar rustic style, such as cundy peeled round posts, for a matching look.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you need a uniform appearance, machine half round rails will look tidier than peeled rails.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSet the posts first, firmly in the ground. Fix each rail flat face to the post with galvanised nails, at least two per post. Stagger joints between rail rows so they do not all fall on the same post. Treat any cut ends with a suitable preservative. Check rails each season for loose nails or damage from livestock.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy does the thickness vary?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rails are peeled, not machine rounded, so they follow the natural shape of the pole. The diameter is generally between 100mm and 125mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many rails per bay?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt least three is normal for post and rail fencing. Use more, or add wire mesh, for smaller animals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long will they last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier states the tanalised timber is protected against rotting for up to 8 years. Site conditions affect the real lifespan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan they be painted or stained?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, once the timber has dried out. Many people let them weather to silver grey instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRails are sold individually and priced per rail. A minimum order of 10 rails applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"3.6m x 100-125mm","offer_id":63294349214083,"sku":"SSHF-800649-01","price":21.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/cundy-peeled-half-round-rails-paddock-1c1f4c77-e7a7-497b-b3e7-151d94cf6f55.jpg?v=1794608129"},{"product_id":"fence-post-repair-spur-1-2m-100x100mm","title":"Fence Post Repair Spur, 1.2m x 100mm x 100mm, for Rotted Square Timber Posts","description":"\u003cp\u003eA repair spur lets you save a timber fence post that has rotted at ground level without taking the fence down. Wooden posts nearly always fail just at or below the ground, where the timber stays damp, while the part above ground is still sound. The spur is set in the ground beside the damaged post and bolted to the sound timber above, so it takes over the job of holding the post upright. This spur is 1.2m long with a 100mm x 100mm section and is sold individually. The supplier's photographs show a grey concrete spur with three pre-formed bolt holes near one end. Homeowners, landlords, handymen and fencing contractors use repair spurs to fix leaning or broken fences quickly and cheaply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy it works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRepairs the post, not the whole fence\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReplacing a rotten post usually means taking down the panels or boards each side. A spur goes in beside the old post instead, so the panels, rails and boards stay where they are. The supplier describes this as cost effective, as it avoids replacing the entire fence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes not rot like timber\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier states the repair spur will not degrade as timber does. Below ground, where the old post failed, the spur stays sound. It reinforces and strengthens the fence line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePre-formed bolt holes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe holes near the top of the spur take the bolts that clamp it to the post. That means no drilling into the spur on site, only through the timber post.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKnow the limits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA spur works when the post above ground is still sound. If the post is rotten higher up, or badly split, replace it. The spur is heavy, with a listed weight of 28kg, so plan to handle it with care. Bolts and postfix are not listed as included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhere it's used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixing leaning panel fences after high winds\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRepairing posts rotted at ground level\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStrengthening gate-side and end posts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLandlord and maintenance repairs between tenancies\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFence post repair spur\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100mm x 100mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConcrete, as shown in the supplier's photographs; composition and reinforcement not published for this line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBolt holes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree, near one end (as pictured)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuits\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSquare timber fence posts rotted at ground level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixing\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePostfix and coach or carriage bolts (not listed as included)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eListed weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e28kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSold as\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSingle spurs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the right option\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis spur comes in one size, 1.2m x 100mm x 100mm, which suits standard square timber fence posts. The question is whether a spur is the right repair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a spur when the post is rotten only at or just below ground level and the timber above is firm. Push a screwdriver into the post about 300mm above the ground: if it goes in easily, the rot is too high and the post should be replaced.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou need one spur per damaged post. For a long fence with many failing posts, compare the cost of spurs with new posts before you start. Bolt length depends on your post size; allow enough to pass through the spur and the post with room for a washer and nut.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInstallation, use \u0026amp; care\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDig a hole beside the damaged post, on the side away from the panels. Cut away the rotten stump if it is in the way. Stand the spur in the hole tight against the post, with the holes at the top. Prop the post upright and set the spur in postfix. When it has set, drill through the post using the spur holes as a guide and fit the coach or carriage bolts. Tighten so the post is held firmly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAre bolts included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBolts and postfix are not listed as included. You need coach or carriage bolts and postfix to install the spur.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it on a round post?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe supplier describes it for square fence posts. A round post will not sit flat against the spur.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow deep does the spur go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTypically about half the spur's length goes in the ground, leaving the holes above ground beside sound timber. Adjust to suit your soil.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it heavy?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The listed weight is 28kg, so lift with care or with two people.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrdering \u0026amp; delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSpurs are sold individually and priced per spur. A minimum order of 5 spurs applies, shown when you add to basket. Delivery charges and lead times are shown at checkout.\u003c\/p\u003e\n","brand":"Industrial Supplies Co","offers":[{"title":"1.2m x 100mm x 100mm","offer_id":63294350492035,"sku":"SSHF-234093-01","price":48.9,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0621\/3002\/8778\/files\/concrete-fence-post-repair-spur-lawn-75539417-3102-4060-bd64-69a2a4551ae8.jpg?v=1794608153"}],"url":"https:\/\/industrialsuppliesco.co.uk\/collections\/timber-wire-fencing.oembed?page=2","provider":"industrialsuppliesco.co.uk","version":"1.0","type":"link"}